Gessmann

Setting big things
into motion.
Industrial Controllers
Catalog 2017

Your tool for fi nding industrial controllers for cranes, electro-hy-
draulic systems, fl oor conveyors, industrial applications, ships, rail vehicles, and construction machinery of any kind, joysticks and masterswitches with electronic interface adjustment for all machines matching our product portfolio. Take advantage of our fold-out order tool on this page and the detailed tables of contents at the beginning of each position.
Tool for Designers,
Engineers and Purchasing Agents
Product range
1 Multi-axis controller
Double-handle controller
Single-axis controller
Control switch
Standard contact-arrangement
Technical data
2 Potentiometer
HG 1
OEC 2
OEC 4
Electronic control unit MATRIX grip
Hall-push button Palm grip Housing
3 Crane control unit
Driver seat
Ordering information
Portable control unit
Control pedestal for offshore 4 Naval cruise controller
Pedal-controller
Gear limit switch
DC-contact Signal-cam controller As of
2017
Product Portfolio
Multi-axis controller, double-handle controller, control switch
(master-switch), gear limit switch for hoisting, electro-hydraulic
application, material-handling technology and remote control
Geared limit switch for joisting equipment
Complete crane control unit, portable control unit, pendant control
unit, including wiring for all types of cranes, vehicles and industrial
applications
Operating panels for construction machinery, industrial applications,
vehicles and harvesting machines
Control pedestals, ship-operating transmitters, sensor units and
actual-value transmitters for ship drives
Pedal controllers for welding machines, road and rail vehicles
Master controllers, panels and control stations for rail vehicles
Displays for forklifts and construction machinery
Proportional control electronics for solenoid valves
Interface electronics with digital and analog outputs matching
our controllers
Interface electronics with Profibus interface or CAN-bus interface
matching our controllers (input/output cards)
DC controllers, selector switches (signal controllers) for high-voltage
systems
Customized solutions for operating devices and electronic units for
any type of machinery and vehicles
Gessmann is an international market leader. Our success in the market is based upon our
decisive focus on innovative product development and the highest possible standards when
it comes to quality. Our product range includes:
Management certification:
Contents
Multi-axis controller V6 / VV6 p. 1-5
V11 p. 6-9
V8 / VV8 p. 10-13
V85 / VV85 p. 14-24
V24 p. 25-28
V25 p. 29-36
V26 p. 37-41
V1 p. 42-50
V14 p. 51-54
V20 p. 55-56
V22 p. 57-58
V23 p. 59-60
V21 p. 61-62
Double-handle controller D64 / DD64 p. 63-67
D8 p. 68-71
D85 p. 72-80
D3 p. 81-85
Single-axis controller S1 p. 86-88
S11 p. 89-92
S14 p. 93-95
S2 / SS 2 / S21 p. 96-100
S22 / SS22 p. 101-104
S23 p. 105-107
S26 p. 108-111
S27 p. 112-115
S3 p. 116-119
S9 p. 120-121
Thumbwheel S12 p. 122-123
Control switch N6 p. 124-125
N9 p. 126-128
p. 129-130
p. 131
p. 132-133
p. 134
p. 135-136
p. 137-139
p. 140
ES/43 p. 141-142
p. 143
p. 144-146
Standard plug connector
Standard contact-arrangement
Technical data
Potentiometer
HG 2
OEC 2
OEC 4
Electronic control unit
MATRIX grip
Hall-push button
Palm grip B1 p. 147-148
B2 p. 149-150
B3 p. 151-153
B5 p. 154-155
B6 p. 156-157
B7 / B8 p. 158-160
B9 p. 161-162
B10 p. 163-164
B14 / B15 p. 165-166
B20 p. 167-168
B22 p. 169-170
B23 p. 171-172
B24 p. 173-174
B25 p. 175-176
B28 p. 177-178
B29 p. 179-180
B30 p. 181-182
B31 p. 183-184
B32 p. 185-186
Housing p. 187-188
Crane control unit KST 4 p. 189-191
KST 5 p. 192-194
KST 6 p. 195-197
KST 7 / KST 75 p. 198-200
KST 8 p. 201-203
KST 85 p. 204-205
KST 10 p. 206-208
KST 19 p. 209-211
KST 30 p. 212-214
Driver seat KFS 2 p. 215-216
KFS 4 p. 217-218
KFS 82 p. 219-220
KFS 9 p. 221-222
KFS 10 p. 223-224
KFS 11 p. 225-226
KFS 12 p. 227-228
Ordering information p. 229-233
Portable control unit TS 1 p. 234-236
TS 2 p. 237-239
Control pedestal for offshore U 22/32 p. 240-242
U 23/23 p. 243-245
Naval cruise controller AZ 1 p. 246-247
Pedal-controller P7 / PP7 p. 248-249
P8 / PP8 p. 250-251
P10 / P11 / P12 p. 252-253
P20 p. 254-257
Gear limit switch GE 1/2 p. 258-260
DC-contact SO / SS p. 261-262
Signal-cam controller NU 1 p. 263-265
General Terms and Conditions
For our general conditions for sale and delivery please refer to our website at www.gessmann.com
Please also note:
Our catalog prices do not include value added tax, which is added separately.
The prices are ex-works in Leingarten excluding packaging. Packaging is charged at cost and cannot be returned.
For orders below EURO 150.00 our gross prices are applicable. The minimum invoice amount is EURO 80.00,
regardless of the value of the delivered goodp. Therefore, we recommend combining small orderp.
We are entitled to pass on any additional handling and production costs resulting from modifications to the order
caused or requested by the customer (both technical modifications and non-compliance with deadlines).
Our periods of payment are: 30 days without a discount.
These conditions of payment shall be deemed agreed and accepted upon receipt of our written confirmation of orderp.
All delivered goods shall remain our sole and absolute property until full payment is received.
The delivery period only commences upon clarification of all technical detailp. Unforeseen circumstances justify an
appropriate extension of the delivery period. All documents, such as drawings, dimensional drawings, circuit
diagrams, etc., are non-binding. We reserve the right to make any changes necessary, in particular changes which
serve the technical advancement.
The exclusive place of jurisdiction is 74072 Heilbronn, Germany.
! Warning
Certain parts of this electrical device carry hazardous voltages
when in operation.
Installation, maintenance, modification or retrofitting may only be
carried out by qualified personnel in consideration of the appropriate
safety precautionp.
Non-compliance may result in death, severe injuries or substantial
property damage.
W. Gessmann GmbH
P/O Box 11 51
74207 Leingarten
GERMANY
Eppinger Straße 221
74211 Leingarten
GERMANY
Phone +49 (0) 7131 40 67-722
Fax +49 (0) 7131 40 67-10
sales@gessmann.com
www.gessmann.com
Bank details
Deutsche Bank Heilbronn
SWIFT-Code: DEUT DE SS 620 · IBAN-Code: DE 14 620 700 81 0019460500
Kreissparkasse Heilbronn
SWIFT-Code: HE IS DE 66 · IBAN-Code: DE 22 620 500 000 00 0004776
Landesbank Baden-Württemberg
SWIFT-Code: SOLA DE ST · IBAN-Code: DE 09 600 501 01 74 06 50 56 07
Tax No.: 65205/74401 Finanzamt Heilbronn
Sale tax ID No.: DE 145786508
Commercial Register
Stuttgart HRB 100312
Managing Director:
Alwin Ehrensperger
1
Multi-axis controller
V6 / VV6
page 1
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V6 / VV6 is available in either single-axis or multi-axis options
and is a robust controller used commonly in electro-hydraulic applications.
The modular design and many possibilities of combination with our handles enables
the switching device to be used universally.
The V6 / VV6 is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV radiation
typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V6 10 million operating cycles
Mechanical life VV6 20 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54 front
Example
V62L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Basic unit
V62L 2-axis left
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Gate
P Cross gate
Grip / palm grip
T Dead man
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
01 2 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Axis 2 (direction 3-4)
03A 6 contacts (4A 250V AC15)
R Friction brake
C Opto-electronical encoder
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MS21
P134 Potentiometer T396 2x5kOhm
Description axis 2 (direction 3-4)
A110 Arrangement MS24-0
C01 OEC 2-1-1
Special model
X Special / customer specified
1
Multi-axis controller
V6 / VV6
Combination possibilities with our handles
page 2
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
V62L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Basic unit
V61L 1-axis left Identifi cation of the installation variants
V61R 1-axis right with switching directions:
V61.1 1-axis
V64.1 1-axis
V62L 2-axis left
V62R 2-axis right
V64 2-axis
reinforced version
VV61L 1-axis left
VV61R 1-axis right
VV61.1 1-axis
VV64.1 1-axis
VV62L 2-axis left
VV62R 2-axis right
VV64 2 axis
Control-handle extended*
Standard 180mm
S3 -40mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only available in combination with handle!
Gate
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
1
2
1-2
1
2
1-2
1
2
3 4
3-4
1-2
1
2
1
2
3 4
3-4
5
6
5-6
5
6
7 8
7-8
5-6
V61L/VV61L
V61.1/VV61.1
V62L/VV62L
V64/VV64
V64.1/VV64.1
V61R/VV61R
V62R/VV62R
B1 B3 B5 B6 B10 B14 B15 B22 B24 B28
p. 147 p. 151 p. 154 p. 156 p. 163 p. 165 p. 169 p. 173 p. 177
B30
p. 183
B32
p. 185
1
Multi-axis controller
V6 / VV6
page 3
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
V62L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Grip / palm grip
Knob (included in basic unit!)
M Mechanical zero interlock
MN Mechanical zero interlock (push down)
T Dead man
MT* Mechanical zero interlock + dead man
H Signal button
MH Mechanical zero interlock + signal button
D Push button
MD* Mechanical zero interlock + push button
DV Flush push button
MDV* Mechanical zero interlock + flush push button
*Only possible with VV6!
B… Palm grip B… (see Palm grip page 147)
Attention! When usage some handles reduces the deflection angle
to 28 degrees!
V62L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left / direction 5-6 right
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts z.B.
03 6 contacts A980 MS00
04 8 contacts A05 MS21
05 10 contacts A0500 MS21-00
06 12 contacts A110 MS24-0
A = silver contacts (4A 250V AC15) A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Encoder C… Encoder see page 137
1
Multi-axis controller
V6 / VV6
page 4
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
If both axis identical, it`s enough to describe one axis!
Example A05P134 + A05P134 => A05P134
V62L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Axis 2: direction 3-4 left / Direction 7-8 right (not applicable for V/VV61, V/VV61.1, V/VV64.1)
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts z.B.
03 6 contacts A980 MS00
04 8 contacts A05 MS21
05 10 contacts A0500 MS21-00
06 12 contacts A110 MS24-0
A = Silver contacts (4A 250V AC15) A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Encoder C… Encoder see page 137
V62L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Special model
X Special /customer specified
Attachments
Indicating labels
Indicating labels with engraving
1
Multi-axis controller
V6 / VV6
page 5
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
46
10
77
180
85
40°
40°
A
max. 4
T MN
H M
MP
Cover plate
CAGE CLAMP®
connection
max. 2,5mm²
IP 54
IP 00
96
B
B
30
80
25
80
5,5
72
80
30
30
3,5
Hole pattern
Potentiometer
T 396
OEC-mounting
203
Palm grip B3
155
Palm grip B5
180
38 Palm grip B1
B1 T= Dead man’s button
1 / 101
Type No. of
contacts Dim. A Dim. B
01 2 119 82
02 4 131 94
03 6 144 107
04 8 156 119
05 10 169 132
06 12 181 144
1
Multi-axis controller
V11
page 6
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V11 is a robust switching device for crane and hoisting
applications. The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The V11 is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV radiation
typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life 10 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54 front
V11L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R – A05 P324 + A110 – X
Basic unit
V11L 2-axis left
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Gate
P Cross gate
Grip / palm grip
T Dead man
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
01 2 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Axis 2 (direction 3-4)
03A 6 contacts (4A 250V AC15)
R Friction brake
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MS21
P324 Potentiometer T365 2x5kOhm
Description axis 2 (direction 3-4)
A110 Arrangement MS24-0
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
Multi-axis controller
V11
page 7
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
V11L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R P – A05 P324 + A110 P325 – X
Basic unit Identifi cation of the installation variants
V11L 2-axis left with switching directions:
V11R 2-axis right
V11.1L 1-axis left
V11.1R 1-axis right
Control-handle extended*
Standard 120mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only available in combination with handle!
Gate
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
Grip / palm grip
Knob (included in basic unit!)
M Mechanical zero interlock
MN Mechanical zero interlock (push down)
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
DV Flush push button
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
Combination possibilities with our handles
B1 B5 B6 B10 B14 B15 B22 B24 B28
p. 147 p. 154 p. 156 p. 163 p. 165 p. 169 p. 173 p. 177
V11.1 V11
2
3
1
4
1
2
p. 181
p. 185
B32
B30
1
Multi-axis controller
V11
page 8
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
If both axis identical, it`s enough to describe one axis!
example: …A05P324 + A05P324 => A05P324
V11L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R P – A05 P324 + A110 P325 – X
Axis 2: direction 3-4 left / direction 7-8 right (not applied for V11.1)
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts (2A 250V AC15) Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts (2A 250V AC15) z.B.
03 6 contacts (2A 250V AC15) A980 MS00
A05 MS21
A0500 MS21-00
A110 MS24-0
A = Silver contacts (4A 250V AC15) A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P324 T365 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P325 T365 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Encoder C… Encoder see page 137
V11L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R P – A05 P324 + A110 P325 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Indicating labels
Indicating labels with engraving
V11L S5 P T – 01 Z P + 03A R P – A05 P324 + A110 P325 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left / direction 5-6 right
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts e.g.
03 6 contacts A980 MS00
A05 MS21
A0500 MS21-00
A110 MS24-0
A = Silver contacts (4A 250V AC15) A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P324 T365 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P325 T365 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Encoder C… Encoder see page 137
1
Multi-axis controller
V11
page 9
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
55
80
max. 3
120
36°
36°
5
58 ±0,1
70
Hole pattern
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signalbutton
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock T MN
H M
MP
CAGE CLAMP® connection
max. 2,5mm²
Potentiometer T365
Cover plate
IP 54
IP 00
38
135 180
Palm grip B1
Optoelectronical
encoder OEC 2
B B
B B
86
70 78 B
B 78
1 / 111
Type No. of
contacts Dim. B
01 2 51
02 4 64
03 6 76
1
Multi-axis controller
V8 / VV8
page 10
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V8/VV8 is available in either single-axis or multi-axis options and
is a robust controller used commonly in electro-hydraulic applications.
With many output options including voltage, amperage and switch contacts and many
handle options the V8 / VV8 series is hugely customisable.
The V8 / VV8 is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV radiation
typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V8 10 million operating cycles
Mechanical life VV8 20 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
VV8 S5 P T – 2RP + 3ZP – B – A05 P184 + A050 P184 E9012 – X
Basic unit
VV8 2-axis, reinforced version
Control-handle extended
Standard
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only available in combination with handle!
Gate
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
Grip / palm grip
T Dead man
Axis 1
2 Contacts
R Friction brake
P Potentiometer
Axis 2
3 Contacts
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A050 Arrangement MSP21-0
P184 Potentiometer T301 2x5kOhm
Description axis 2 (direction 3-4)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
P184 Potentiometer T301 2x5kOhm
Interface (description see on the following pages)
E9012 Potentiometer output for proportional valve PVG32
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
Multi-axis controller
V8 / VV8
page 11
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
VV8 S5 P T – 2 R P + 3 Z P – B – A05 P184 + A050 P184 E9012 – X
Basic unit
V81 1-axis
V8 2-axis
reinforced version
VV81 1-axis
VV8 2-axis
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
Gate
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
Grip/ palm grip
Knob (included in basic unit!)
M Mechanical zero interlock
MH Mechanical zero interlock + signal contact
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
DV Flush push button
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
Axis 1: direction 1-2
1 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts e.g.
3 3 contacts A98 MS0 Zero position contact
A05 MS21 Direction contacts
A050 MS21-0 Direction contacts + zero position contact
Z Spring return
R Friction brake only possible with VV8!
B1 B2 B3 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B14 B15
B20 B22 B23 B24 B25 B28 B29
p. 147 p. 149 p. 151 p. 154 p. 156 p. 158 p. 161 p. 163
p. 167 p. 169 p. 171 p. 173 p. 175 p. 177 p. 179
S. 165
Combination possibilities with our handles
B30 B31
p. 181 p. 183
p. 185
B32
1
Multi-axis controller
V8 / VV8
page 12
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
If both axis identical, it`s enough to describe one axis!
Example: …A05P43 + A05P43 => A05P43
VV8 S5 P T – 2 R P + 3 Z P – B – A05 P184 + A050 P184 E9012 – X
Axis 2: direction 3-4 (not applied for V81/VV81)
01 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 2 contacts e.g.
03 3 contacts A98 MS0 Zero position contact
A05 MS21 Direction contacts
A050 MS21-0 Direction contacts + zero position contact
Z Spring return
R Friction brake only possible with VV8!
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer
P Potentiometer P181 T301 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P182 T301 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P183 T301 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P184 T301 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P185 T301 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V/4,5V…2,5…0,5
VV8 S5 P T – 2 R P + 3 Z P – B – A05 P184 + A050 P184 E9012 – X
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Interface
Potentiometer output
E901 Potentiometer output for proportional valve PVG32
0,25…0,5…0,75Us
1 1 axis
2 2 axis
3 3 axis
4 4 axis
Special model
X Special / customer specified
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer
P Potentiometer P181 T301 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P182 T301 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P183 T301 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P184 T301 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P185 T301 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V/4,5V…2,5…0,5
1
Multi-axis controller
V8 / VV8
page 13
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
215
IP 65
Palm grip B3
for 3. Direction 11-12
for 4. Direction 13-14
1 / 131
IP 65
30°
30°
10,5
A
90
(Cover housing)
160
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
T MN
H M
MP
IP 54
Cover plate
Cable outlet
IP 00
131
108,5
92
M6
76,5
Hole pattern
225
Palm grip B25
IP 65
IP 65
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
(According to board)
1
Multi-axis controller
page 14
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V85/VV85 is available in either single-axis or multi-axis options
and is a robust controller used commonly in electro-hydraulic applications.
With many output options including voltage, amperage and switching contacts and many
handle options the V85/VV85 series is fl exible and customisable.
The V85/VV85 is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV radiation
typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V85 10 million operating cycles
Mechanical life VV85 20 million operating cycles
Supply voltage See interface
Operation temperature -40°C to + 60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Functional safety PLd (EN ISO 13849) possible
VV85 S8 P T – Z80 + R11 – B – E… -S… – X
Basic unit
V85.1 1-axis
V85 2-axis
Reinforced version
VV85.1 1-axis
VV85 2-axis
Control-handle extended
Standard 160mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only available in combination with grip!
Gate
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
Grip / palm grip
Knob (included in basic unit!)
M Knob with mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
V85 / VV85
Example
1
page 15
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
VV85 S8 P T – Z80 + R11 – B – E… – S… – X
Axis 1 / Axis 2 (not applied for V/VV85.1)
Z Spring return
R Friction brake*
Latching:*
11 1-0-1
22 2-0-2
33 3-0-3
44 4-0-4
55 5-0-5
08 end-position latching SR2
19 1-0-1 + end-position latching SR2
80 end-position latching SR1
91 1-0-1 + end-position latching SR1
88 end-position latching SR1+SR2
99 1-0-1 + end-position latching SR1+SR2
*Maximum deflection angle +/- 25 degree!
Cover housing
B Cover housing (included in basic unit!)
Interface (description see on the following pages)
E0xx Switching output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
E3xx CAN-interface
E4xx CANOpen safety interface
E5xx Profibus DP-interface
E6xx Profinet
E7xx Profinet safe
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
1
page 16
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
Digital output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 Direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E001 1
2 axis 2
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals per axis
1 axis E104 1
2 axis 2
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
B1 B2 B3 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B14 B15
B20 B22 B23 B24 B25 B28 B29
p. 147 p. 149 p. 151 p. 154 p. 156 p. 158 p. 161 p. 163
p. 167 p. 169 p. 171 p. 173 p. 175 p. 177 p. 179
p. 165
Combination possibilities with our handles
p. 181 p. 183
B30 B31
B32
p. 185
1
page 17
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E112 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
0…5…10V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC
1 axis E132 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
10…0…10V + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC,
sensor redundant with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E136 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual *􀈻 1
Dual *􀈻 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 4
*􀈻 not combinable with output E136X
Single *􀈼 5
Single with dead zone *􀈼 6
*􀈼 not combinable with output E112X and E132X
Digital output signals:
Output signals standard: 0
Direction signals and zero position signals 1,5A 24VDC 1
*Axis for handle functions, interface can vary depending upon actuation element!
Voltage output with other value on request!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
1
page 18
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E206 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
20…0…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E208 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
4…12…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E214 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
20…4…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E216 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/- 3° 6
Digital output signals:
Output signals standard: 0
Direction signals and zero position signals 1,5A 24VDC 1
*Axis for handle functions, interface can vary depending upon actuation element!
Current output with other value on request!
1
page 19
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
CAN
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA (24V DC)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA (potential-free)
External digital output for LEDs 5mA – 30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A E3091: 60mm
E3091X: 85mm
E3101X – E3103X: 85mm
E3104X – E3105X: 105mm
Protocol CANopen CiA DS 301 or SAE J1939
Baud rate 20kBit/s to 1Mbit/s (standard 250kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector (additionally from 32 in-/outputs)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CAN Expansion stage 1 E309 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
CAN Expansion stage 2 E310 1
– 10 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensors
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16 external digital inputs 3
– 24 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 24 external digital inputs 4
– 32 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 32* external digital inputs 5
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of two capacitive sensors, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
Main-axis with additional digital-/analog outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
Additional analog outputs on request!
1
page 20
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
CANopen safety
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA (24V DC)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA (potential-free)
External digital output for LEDs 5mA – 30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A E4091: 60mm
E4091X: 85mm
E4101X – E4103X: 85mm
E4104X – E4105X: 105mm
Protocol CANopen Safety CIA 304
Baud rate 20kBit/s to 1MBit/s (standard 250kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector (additionally from 32 in-/outputs)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CANopen safety expansion stage 1 E409 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
*external LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
CANopen safety expansion stage 2 E410 1
– 10 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensors
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16 external digital inputs 3
– 24 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 24 external digital inputs 4
– 32 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 32* external digital inputs 5
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of two capacitive sensors, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
Main-axis with additional digital-/analog outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
Additional analog outputs on request!
1
page 21
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
Profibus DP
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 12MBit/s
Output value 0…128…255
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Profibus, cable 100mm with plug connector D-Sub 9
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
Profibus DP E501 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 16 external digital inputs 3
*External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional contact equipment separately wired (not via profibus)
– 2 direction contacts + 1 zero position contact (not potential-free) per main-axis 1
– 1 zero position contact (potential-free) per main-axis 2
Profinet
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 100MBit/s
Output value 0…512…1023
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring Profinet (1), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Profinet (2), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
Profinet E601 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With with additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 16 external digital inputs 3
*External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional signals separately wired (not via profinet)
– 2 direction signals + zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
1
page 22
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
Profinet safe
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 100MBit/s
Output value 0…512…1023
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring Profinet (IN), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Profinet (OUT), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
– 4 analog joystick axis E701 1
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 16 external digital inputs 3
*External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional signals separately wired (not via profinet safe)
– 2 direction signals + zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
Other outputs
Voltage output for PVG32 0,25…0,5…0,75Us, power supply 9-32V DC
Wiring: 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector (for axis 3+4 or grip function)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
1 axis E907 1
2 axis 2
3 axis 3
4 axis 4
5 axis 5
6 axis 6
Main-axis with additional direction contacts per main-axis 4
8 Bit Gray-Code with direction signals per main-axis, supply voltage 9-36V DC
Wiring: 1. cable 37×0,14mm² 300mm long without plug connector (axis 1+2)
2. cable 37×0,14mm² 300mm long without plug connector (axis 3+4)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
1 axis E903 1
2 axis 2
3 axis 3
4 axis 4
1
page 23
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
8 Bit Binär-Code with direction signals per main-axis, supply voltage 9-36V DC
Wiring: 1. cable 37×0,14mm² 300mm long without plug connector (axis 1+2)
2. cable 37×0,14mm² 300mm long without plug connector (axis 3+4)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
1 axis E904 1
2 axis 2
3 axis 3
4 axis 4
Attachments
Z01 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (male insert) with 2m cable 20201140
Z02 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (female contact) with 2m cable 20202298
Z03 Mating connector (Profibus) straight 22201440
Z04 Mating connector (Profibus) 90° angled 22201741
Z05 Mating connector (Profinet) M12 (male insert) with 2m cable 5300000222
1
page 24
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V85 / VV85
A 215
IP 65
IP 65
Palm grip B3
for 3. Direction 11-12
for 4. Direction 13-14
1 / 133 160
30° *
30° *
10,5
A
90
(Cover housing)
T
H
IP 54
Cover plate
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
Cable outlet
IP 00
* Type with firction brake
deflection max. 25 deg.
* Type with detent
deflection max. 25 deg.
131
108,5
92
M6
76,5
Hole pattern
A 225
Palm grip B25
IP 65
IP 65
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
(According
to board)
1
Multi-axis controller
page 25
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
V24
The association drive V24 is designed as a driving joystick for construction and
agricultural machinery. It has a parking position which can be inserted in the zero
position. The V24 is characterized by its extremely rugged design.
Through it`s various interfaces and the many possibilities of combination with our
numerous ball handles the V24 is very flexible.
Technical data
Mechanical life V24 20 million operating cycles
Supply voltage See interface
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Functional safety PLd (EN ISO 13849) possible
V24 P1 T – R – E… – S… – X
Basic unit
V24.1 Multi-axis controller, 1-axis
V24L Multi-axis controller, 1-axis with parking position left
V24R Multi-axis controller, 1-axis parking position right
Gate
P1 T-gate main axis axial (included in basic unit!)
P2 T-gate main axis right outside
P3 T-gate main axis left outside
PX Special gate
Grip / Palm grip
Knob (included in basic unit!)
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
Main axis
R Friction brake adjustable (included in basic unit!)
Interface (description see on the following pages)
E3xx CAN-interface
E4xx CANOpen Safety interface
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
page 26
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V24
CAN
Supply voltage 9-36V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Protocol CANOpen CiA DS 301 or SAE J 1939
Baud rate 125kBit/s to 1Mbit/s
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CAN V24 E312 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 15 digital joystick functions
*With the use of external inputs, the joystickfunctions reduce by 7 pieces!
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 1 switching output (potentialfree, 100mA), 7 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 1 switching output (potentialfree, 100mA), 7 external digital inputs 3
With additional digital outputs for the main-axis
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (potential-free) per axis 3
Additional analog outputs on request!
B1 B2 B3 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B14 B15
B20 B22 B23 B24 B25 B28 B29
p. 147 p. 149
p. 167 p. 169
p. 151 p. 154 p. 156 p. 158 p. 161 p. 163 p. 165
p. 171 p. 173 p. 175 p. 177 p. 179
Combination possibilities with our handles
B30 B31
p. 181 p. 183
p. 185
B32
1
page 27
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V24
CANOpen safety
Supply voltage 9-36V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Protocol CANOpen safety CIA 304
Baud rate 125kBit/s to 1Mbit/s
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CANopen Safety V24 E411 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 15 digital joystick functions
*With the use of external inputs, the joystickfunctions reduce by 7 pieces!
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 1 switching output (potentialfree, 100mA), 7 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 1 switching output (potentialfree, 100mA), 7 external digital inputs 3
With additional digital outputs for the main-axis
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (potential-free) per axis 3
Additional analog outputs on request!
Attachments
Z01 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (male insert) with 2m cable 20201140
Z02 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (female contact) with 2m cable 20202298
1
page 28
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V24
60
12,3
91
15° 15°
IP 54
IP 00
Cover plate
108,5
131
92
M6
76,5
Hole pattern
91
206
25°
25°
1 / V24
1
Multi-axis controller
V25
page 29
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V25 is available in either single-axis or multi-axis options and is
a robust controller used commonly in electro-hydraulic applications.
With many output options including voltage, amperage and switching contacts and many
handle options the V25 series is hugly customisable.
The V25 is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV radiation
typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V25 8 million operating cycles
Supply voltage See interface
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Functional safety PLd (EN ISO 13849) possible
V25 S8 P T – Z – B – E… – S… – X
Basic unit
V25.1 1-axis
V25 2-axis
Control-handle long
Standard 100mm
S8 +20mm
*Only available in combination with grip!
Gate
P Cross gate
Grip / palm grip
Knob (included in basic unit!)
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Knob with dead man
H Knob with signal button
D Knob with push button KDA/70
B … Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
Spring return (includet in basic unit!)
Z Spring return
Cover housing (description see page 187)
B Cover housing
Interface (description see on the following page)
E0xx Switching output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
E3xx CAN-interface
E4xx CANOpen Safety interface
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specifi ed
Example
1
Multi-axis controller
V25
page 30
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
B1 B2 B3 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B14 B15
B20 B22 B23 B24 B25 B28 B29
p. 167 p. 169
p. 149 p. 151 p. 154 p. 156 p. 158 p. 161 p. 163 p. 165
p. 171 p. 173 p. 175 p. 177 p. 179
Combination possibilities with our handles
p. 147
p. 181 p. 183
B30 B31
p. 185
B32
Digital output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 Direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E001 1
2 axis 2
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals per axis
1 axis E104 1
2 axis 2
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
1
Multi-axis controller
V25
page 31
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E112 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
0…5…10V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC
1 axis E132 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
10…0…10V + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC,
sensor redundant with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E136 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual *􀈻 1
Dual *􀈻 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 4
*􀈻 not combinable with output E136X
Single *􀈼 5
Single with dead zone *􀈼 6
*􀈼 not combinable with output E112X and E132X
Digital output signals:
Output signals standard: 0
Direction signals and zero position signals 1,5A 24VDC 1
*Axis for handle functions, interface can vary depending upon actuation element!
Voltage output with other value on request!
1
Multi-axis controller
V25
page 32
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 60mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E206 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
20…0…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E208 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
4…12…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E214 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
20…4…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E216 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/- 3° 6
Digital output signals:
Output signals standard: 0
Direction signals and zero position signals 1,5A 24VDC 1
*Axis for handle functions, interface can vary depending upon actuation element!
Current output with other value on request!
1
Multi-axis controller
V25
page 33
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
2
1
2
3 4
V25.1 V25
Identification of the installation variants with switching directions:
CAN
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA (24VDC)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA
External digital output for LEDs 5mA – 30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A 60mm (Expansion stage 1)
75mm (Expansion stage 2)
95mm (Expansion stage 3)
Protocol CANOpen CiA DS 301 or SAE J1939
Baud rate 20kBit/s to 1Mbit/s (standard 250kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector (additional from 32 in-/outputs)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CAN V25 expansion stage 1 E304 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 15 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
Main-axis with additional digital outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals per main axis 1
CAN V25 expansion stage 2 E305 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 15 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensors
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16 external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
1
Multi-axis controller
V25
page 34
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
CANopen safety
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA (24V DC)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA (potential-free)
External digital output for LEDs 5mA – 30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Baud rate 20kBit/s to 1MBit/s (standard 250kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
Mounting depth 60mm (Expansion stage 1)
75mm (Expansion stage 2)
95mm (Expansion stage 3)
Protocol CANopen Safety CIA 304
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector (additional from 32 in-/outputs)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CANopen Safety expansion stage 1 E404 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 15 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
Main-axis with additional digital outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals per main axis 1
CANopen safety expansion stage 2 E405 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 15 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensors
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16 external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
CAN V25 expansion stage 3 E306 1
– 10 analog joystick axis
– 15 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensors
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 2 switching outputs (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 2 switching outputs (potential-free, 100mA), 16 external digital inputs 3
– 24 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 2 switching outputs (potential-free, 100mA), 24 external digital inputs 4
– 32 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 2 switching outputs (potential-free, 100mA), 32 external digital inputs 5
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional digital outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (potential-free) per axis 3
With additional analog outputs on request!
1
Multi-axis controller
V25
page 35
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
CANopen safety expansion stage 3 E406 1
– 10 analog joystick axis
– 15 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 2 switching outputs (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 2 switching outputs (potential-free, 100mA), 16 external digital inputs 3
– 24 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 2 switching outputs (potential-free, 100mA), 24 external digital inputs 4
– 32 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 2 switching outputs (potential-free, 100mA), 32 external digital inputs 5
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional digital outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (potential-free) per axis 3
With additional analog outputs on request!
Attachments
Z01 Mating connector M12 male insert with 2m cable 20201140
Z02 Mating connector M12 female insert with 2m cable 20202298
1
Multi-axis controller
V25
page 36
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
100
20°
20°
A
6
IP 54
Cover plate
T
H M
IP 54
38
65
(Cover housing)
A 165
Palm grip B1
IP 54
(According
to board)
IP 54
80
5
56,5 ±0,2
66
Hole pattern
1
2
3 4
A 215
Palm grip B3
IP 55
IP 55
1 /135
A 223
Palm grip B25
IP 55
IP 55
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
1
Multi-axis controller
V26
page 37
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V26 is a robust controller used commonly in electro-hydraulic
applications.
With many output options including voltage, amperage and switching contacts and many
handle options the V26 series is hugly customisable.
Technical data
Mechanical life V26 10 million operating cycles
Supply voltage See interface
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP22
V26 T – R + R – B – E… -S… – X
Basic unit
V26 2-axis
Grip / palm grip
Knob (included in basic unit!)
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
Axis 1
R Friction brake
Axis 2
R Friction brake
Cover housing
B Cover housing (included in basic unit!)
Interface (description see on the following pages)
E0xx Switching output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
E3xx CAN-interface
E4xx CANOpen safety interface
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
1
Multi-axis controller
V26
page 38
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Digital output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
2 axis E002 2
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant per axis
2 Achsen E103 2
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant per axis
2 axis E111 2
0…5…10V redundant per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC
2 axis E131 2
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
Voltage output with other value on request!
1
Multi-axis controller
V26
page 39
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA per axis, sensor redundant with error monitoring and error signal
2 axis E203 2
4…12…20mA per axis, sensor redundant with error monitoring and error signal
2 axis E211 2
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/- 3° 6
Current output with other value on request!
CAN
Supply voltage 9-36V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA
External digital output for LEDs 5-30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A E3091: 105mm
E3091X: 130mm
E3101X – E3103X: 130mm
E3104X – E3105X: 160mm
Protocol CANOpen CiA DS 301 or SAE J 1939
Baud rate 125kBit/s to 1Mbit/s (standard 250 kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm without plug connector (additionally from 32 in-/outputs)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129)
CAN expansion stage 1 E309 1
– 7 analoge Joystickachsen
– 16 digitale Joystickfunktionen
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
1
Multi-axis controller
V26
CANopen Safety
Supply voltage 9-36V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA
External digital output for LEDs 5-30mA (depending on the number of LED`s)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A E4091: 105mm
E4091X: 130mm
E4101X – E4103X: 130mm
E4104X – E4105X: 160mm
Protocol CAN Safety CIA 304
Baud rate 125kBit/s to 1MBit/s (Standard 250 kBits)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm without plug connector (additionally from 32 in-/outputs)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CANOpen safety expansion stage 1 E409 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
Other outputs
Voltage output for PVG32 0,25…0,5…0,75Us, power supply 9-32V DC
Wiring: 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector (for axis 3+4 or grip function)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 axis E907 2
Attachments
Z01 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (male insert) with 2m cable 20201140
Z02 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (female contact) with 2m cable 20202298
page 40
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Multi-axis controller
V26
page 41
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
92
M6
76,5
Hole pattern
88,5
101 (A)
12
236
169
150
SR1 SR2
point of actuation
10-12 N
limit stop possible at
0° / 10° / 20° / 30° / 40°
IP 00
Cover plate
(According to
the board)
IP 54
Palm grip B20
100
120
SR3 SR4
point of actuation 4-6 N
various deflection
overstop plate possible
max.
135°
max.
135°
(Cover housing)
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 42
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V1 is a robust switching device for crane and hoisting
applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The V1 is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV radiation
typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V1 6 million operating cycles
Supply voltage See interface
Operation temperature -40°C tl +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
V1 P H11 H13 H15 H17 – Z + Z – B – E… – S… – X
Basic unit
V1.1 1-axis
V1 2-axis
Gate
P Cross gate
PX Special gate
Grip / Grip functions
Grip (included in basic unit!)
H11 Additional axis 1 / Grip up – down
H13 Additional axis 2 / Grip rotate left – right
H15 Additional axis 3 / Grip tilt forwards – backwards
H17 Additional axis 4 / Grip tilt left – right
Axis 1
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
Axis 2 (not applicable to V1.1)
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
Cover housing
B Cover housing (included in basic unit!)
Interface (description see on the following pages)
E0xx Switching output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
E3xx CAN-interface
E4xx CANOpen safety interface
E5xx Profibus DP-interface
E6xx Profinet
E7xx Profinet safe
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 43
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Digital output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E001 1
2 axis 2
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant signals per axis
1 axis E103 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
5 axis* 5
6 axis* 6
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 44
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E112 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
5 axis* 5
6 axis* 6
0…5…10V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC
1 axis E132 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
5 axis* 5
6 axis* 6
10…0…10V + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC,
sensor redundant with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E136 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
5 axis* 5
6 axis* 6
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual *􀈻 1
Dual *􀈻 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 4
*􀈻 not combinable with output E136X
Single *􀈼 5
Single with dead zone *􀈼 6
*􀈼 not combinable with output E112X and E132X
Digital output signals:
Output signals standard: 0
Direction signals and zero position signals 1,5A 24V DC 1
Voltage output with other value on request!
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 45
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 500mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² (for axis 3-4 or grip function) 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E206 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
5 axis* 5
6 axis* 6
20…0…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E208 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
5 axis* 5
6 axis* 6
4…12…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E214 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
5 axis* 5
6 axis* 6
20…4…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E216 1
2 axis 2
3 axis* 3
4 axis* 4
5 axis* 5
6 axis* 6
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/- 3° 6
Digital output signals:
Output signals standard: 0
Direction signals and zero position signals 1,5A 24V DC 1
*Axis for handle functions, interface can vary depending upon actuation element!
Current output with other value on request!
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 46
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
CAN
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA (24V DC)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA (potential-free)
External digital output for LEDs 5mA – 30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A E3091: 85mm
E3091X: 105mm
E3101X – E3103X: 105mm
E3104X – E3105X: 130mm
Protocol CANopen CiA DS 301 or SAE J1939
Baud rate 20kBit/s to 1Mbit/s (standard 250kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector (additionally from 32 in-/outputs)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CAN Expansion stage 1 E309 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
CAN Expansion stage 2 E310 1
– 10 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensors
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16 external digital inputs 3
– 24 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 24 external digital inputs 4
– 32 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 32* external digital inputs 5
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of two capacitive sensors, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
Main-axis with additional digital-/analog outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signals (potential-free) per main-axis 3
Additional analog outputs on request!
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 47
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
CANopen safety
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA (24V DC)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA (potential-free)
External digital output for LEDs 5mA – 30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A E4091: 85mm
E4091X: 105mm
E4101X – E4103X: 105mm
E4104X – E4105X: 130mm
Protocol CANopen Safety CIA 304
Baud rate 20kBit/s to 1MBit/s (standard 250kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm long without plug connector (additionally from 32 in-/outputs)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CANopen safety expansion stage 1 E409 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
*External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
CANopen safety expansion stage 2 E410 1
– 10 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensors
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16 external digital inputs 3
– 24 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 24 external digital inputs 4
– 32 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 32* external digital inputs 5
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of two capacitive sensors, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
Main-axis with additional digital-/analog outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signals (potential-free) per main-axis 3
Additional analog outputs on request!
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 48
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Profibus DP
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 12MBit/s
Output value 0…128…255
Mounting depth A 130mm
Wiring Profibus, cable 100mm with plug connector D-Sub 9
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
Profibus DP E501 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 16 external digital inputs 3
*External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional contact equipment separately wired (not via profibus)
– 2 direction contacts + 1 zero position contact (not potential-free) per main-axis 1
– 1 zero position contact (potential-free) per main-axis 2
Profinet
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 100MBit/s
Output value 0…512…1023
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Profinet (1), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Profinet (2), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
Profinet E601 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With with additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 16 external digital inputs 3
*External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional signals separately wired (not via profinet)
– 2 direction signals + zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 49
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Profinet safe
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 100MBit/s
Output value 0…512…1023
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Profinet (1), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Profinet (2), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
– 4 analog joystick axis E701 1
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 16 external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional signals separately wired (not via profinet safe)
– 2 direction signals + zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
Other outputs
Voltage output for PVG32 0,25…0,5…0,75Us, power supply 9-32V DC
Wiring: 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector (for axis 3+4 or grip function)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
1 axis E907 1
2 axis 2
3 axis 3
4 axis 4
5 axis 5
6 axis 6
Main-axis with additional direction contacts per main-axis 4
Attachments
Z01 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (male insert) with 2m cable 20201140
Z02 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (female contact) with 2m cable 20202298
Z03 Mating connector (Profibus) straight 22201440
Z04 Mating connector (Profibus) 90° angled 22201741
Z05 Mating connector (Profinet) M12 (male insert) with 2m cable 5300000222
1
Multi-axis controller
V1
page 50
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
56
35
77 59,5
89 (Cover housing)
10° 10°
2
Cover plate
Cable outlet
75
10° 10°
handle
rotatable and inclinable
54
45
Hole pattern
chamfering
DIN 66-4
1 /
1
Multi-axis controller
V14
page 51
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V14 is a robust switching device for remote control and
eletro-hydraulic applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The V14 is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV radiation
typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V14 6 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
V14L S8 P T – 01 Z C + 03 R – A05 C61 + A110 – X
Basic unit
V14L 2-axis left
Control-handle extended
Standard
S8 +20mm
*Only available in combination with handle!
Gate
P Cross gate
Grip / Palm grip
T Dead man
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
01 2 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
C Mechanical encoder
Axis 2 (direction 3-4)
03 6 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
R Friction brake
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
C61 Mechanical encoder MEC 1-2
Description axis 2 (direction 3-4)
A110 Arrangement MS24-0
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
Multi-axis controller
V14
Combination possibilities with our handles
page 52
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
V14L S8 P T – 01 Z C + 03 R – A05 C61 + A110 – X
Basic unit
V14.1L 1-axis left Identifi cation of the installation variants
V14.1R 1-axis right with switching directions:
V14L 2-axis left
V14R 2-axis right
Control-handle extended
Standard
S8 +20mm
Gate V14.1L V14L
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
Grip / palm grip
Knob 25mm (standard)
M Mechanical zero interlock
MH Mechanical zero interlock + signal contact
T Dead man V14.1R V14R
H Signal button
GK1 Knob 42mm
GK1M Mechanical zero interlock
GK1MN Mechanical zero interlock (push down)
GK1T Dead man
GK1H Signal button
GK1MH Mechanical zero interlock + signal contact
GK1D Push button
GK1DV Flush push button
GS9 Hall-twist grip with spring return
GS9-D Hall-twist grip with spring return and push button on top
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip page 147)
*Attention! The multi-axis controller V14 is not suitable for large palm grips (B3, B7/B8, B9…)
V14L S8 P T – 01 Z C + 03 R – A05 C61 + A110 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left / direction 5-6 right
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts e.g.
03 6 contacts A05 MS21
A0500 MS21-00
A110 MS24-0
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
1
2
1
2
3 4
5
6
5
6
7 8
B5 B6 B22
p. 154 p. 156 p. 169
GS9
p. 54
1
Multi-axis controller
V14
page 53
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
V14L S8 P T – 01 Z C + 03 R – A05 C61 + A110 – X
Z Spring return (included in basic unit!)
R Friction brake
C Mechanical encoder C61 MEC 1-2
EA/02-10 l max. 1mA
Potentiometer track 2x10kOhm
Direction tack Arrangement MS26-0
C62 MEC 1-7
EA/10-10 l max. 1mA
Potentiometer track 2x5kOhm
Direction track Arrangement MS26-0-1
C66 MEC 1-10
EA/17-10 l max. 10mA
Potentiometer track 2×1,5kOhm
Direction track Arrangement MS21-0+MS21
C63 MEC 1-6
EA/09-10
6 Bit Gray Code
C64 MEC 1-6-5
ER/36-10 Us=18-30V
Current output 20…4…20mA
C65 MEC 1-6-8
ER/36-12 Us=18-30V
Current output 20…0…20mA
C67 MEC 1-6-9
ER/36-11 Us=18-30V
Voltage output 10…0…10V
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V / 4,5…2,5…0,5V
If both axis identical, it`s enough to describe one axis!
Example: …A05C61 + A05C61 => A05C61
V14L S8 P T – 01Z C + 03 R – A05 C61 + A110 – X
Axis 2: direction 3-4 left / direction 7-8 right (not applied for V14.1L and V14.1R)
See description axis 1!
Special model
X Special / customer specified
1
Multi-axis controller
V14
page 54
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
42
3,5
51
40
Hole pattern
Knob solid GK
for MN, MP
Twist grip
with Push button
Knob the 3rd max. 4
8
56 60
25
50
40°
40°
CAGE CLAMP® connection
max. 1,5mm²
Mechanical
encoder
Board with solderor
plug terminal
Cover plate IP 65
IP 00
T
H M
71
40°
40°
40
54
52
B
B
28,5
32
Twist grip
28,5
37,5
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
1 / 143
Type No. of
contacts Dim. B
01 2 36
02 4 45
03 6 54
1
Multi-axis controller
V20
page 55
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V20 is a rugged switching device for remote control.
The multi-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V20 3 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
V20 – P D – C71 + C71 – B – X
Basic unit
V20.1 1-axis with spring return
V20 2-axis with spring return
V20.1A 1-axis with spring return, IP67 front
V20A 2-axis with spring return, IP67 front
Gate
p Cross gate
P X Special gate
Grip
Knob (standard)
D Push button
GS9 Hall-twist grip with spring return
GS9-D Hall-twist grip with spring return and push button on top
Axis 1: direction 1-2
C70 Mechanical encoder
MEC 2-1
EA/15-10 l max. 1mA
Potentiometer track 2x5kOhm
Direction track Arrangement MS224-0
C71 Mechanical encoder
MEC 2-2
EA/11-10 l max. 1mA
Potentiometer track 2x5kOhm
Direction track Arrangement MS24-0
C72 Mechanical encoder
MEC 2-5
EA/21-10 l max. 1 mA
Potentiometer track 2x5kOhm
Direction track Arrangement MS25-0
Axis 2: direction 3-4
See description axis 1!
Cover housing
B Cover housing KBQ 905 (IP65)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
Multi-axis controller
V20
5,5
47
27
11
33 55
52
32°
32°
Cover plate
Knob solid
IP 65
IP 00
25
64
32°
32°
51
3,5
40
+0,3
Hole pattern
Board with solder
or plug terminal
Knob solid
with Push button
Twist grip
with Push button
17
52
max. 3
8
41
47
27
33
24°
24°
Cover plate
IP 67
IP 00
50
24°
24°
Board with solder
or plug terminal
55
1
2
3 4
28,5
32
Twist grip
28,5
37,5
V20 Standard degree of protection front IP 65
V20 Degree of protection front IP 67
page 56
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Multi-axis controller
page 57
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
V22
The multi-axis controller V22 is a robust switching device for remote control.
The multi-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V22 3 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
V22A – P D – E10321 – X
Basic unit
V22.1A 1-axis with spring return, installation from below
V22A 2-axis with spring return, installation from below
V22.1B 1-axis with spring return, installation from top
V22B 2-axis with spring return, installation from top
Gate
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
Grip
Knob (standard)
D Push button
GS9 Hall-twist grip with spring return
GS9-D Hall-twist grip with spring return and push button on top
Interface
Voltage output
E103 1 0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant at Ub=5V 1 axis
2 2 axis
Characteristic: 1 = Inverse dual, 2 = Dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Mating connector JST 8-pole 5300000260
Mating connector JST 8-pole with single wire 500mm long 5300000261
Example
1
page 58
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V22
25°
25°
V22A
Installed from below
IP 67
IP 00
max. 4
19 18
28 49
17
25°
25°
V22B
Installed from the top
Cover plate IP 67
IP 00
17
21 52
max. 4
19 18
52
52
37
30
2,7
Hole pattern
(installed from below)
42
35
M3
Hole pattern
(installed from the top)
28,5
32
63,5
(from Cover plate)
Twist grip
28,5
37,5
69,5
(from Cover plate)
Twist grip
with Push button
1 / V22
Cover plate
1
Multi-axis controller
page 59
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
V23
The multi-axis controller V23 is a robust switching device for remote control applications.
The multi-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life V23 3 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP67 front
V23A – P – C80 + C80 – X
Basic unit
V23.1A 1-axis with spring return, installation from below
V23A 2-axis with spring return, installation from below
V23.1B 1-axis with spring return, installation from top
V23B 2-axis with spring return, installation from top
Gate
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
Axis 1: direction 1-2
C80 Mechanical encoder
MEC 3-1
EA/26-10 l max. 1mA
Potentiometer resistance 2x5kOhm
Contact arrangement Arrangement MS24
with 12-pol. JST-connector
Axis 2: direction 3-4 (not applied for V23.1)
See description axis 1!
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Mating connector JST 12-polig (included in delivery!) 5300000263
Mating connector JST 12-pole with single wire 500mm long 5300000264
Example
1
page 60
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Multi-axis controller
V23
25°
25°
V23A
Installed from below
Cover plate IP 67
IP 00
17
max. 4
17,8
27,8 48,1
22,9
25°
25° V23B
Installed from the top
Cover plate IP 67
IP 00
24 51,1
max. 4
17
22,9 18
52
55
37
30
2,7
Hole pattern
(installed from below)
50
40
M3
Hole pattern
(installed from the top)
1 / V23
1
Multi-axis controller
V21
page 61
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The multi-axis controller V21 is a robust hallsensor switching device for electro-hydraulic
applications.
The V21 is especially suitable for installation in our ball handles.
The multi-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore / vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life 5 million operating cycles
Operating force 1,6 to 3,5N
Supply voltage 5V DC stabilized
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP67
V21 P – 1 – E1032 – X
Basic unit
V21.1 1-axis, installation from top with fixing nut
V21 2-axis, installation from top with fixing nut
V21.1A 1-axis, with flange, installation from below
V21A 2-axis, with flange, installation from below
V21.1B 1-axis, with flange, installation from top
V21B 2-axis, with flange, installation from top
V21.1H13 1-axis with additional rotating axis, installation from below
V21H13 2-axis with additional rotating axis, installation from below
Gate
P Cross gate
P X Special gate
Knob
Standard
1 KBAD 980
2 KBAD 1658
3 KBAD 1690
Interface
Voltage output
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant at Ub=5V
1 axis E103 1
2 axis 2
3 axis 3
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
Multi-axis controller
V21
page 62
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
max.5
34
12
25°
25°
Cable outlet
Standard
installed from the top
Cover plate
SW 30
26,5
Hole pattern
M24x1,5
max.3
34
20
25°
25°
Cover housing
Version A with flange
installed from below
31
26,5
25 ±0,1
2,7
Hole pattern
M24x1,5
max.5
13
25°
25°
36
Version B with flange
installed from the top
with actuator KBAD 980
31
24,5
25 ±0,1
2,7
Hole pattern
6
36
77
17,5
25°
25°
Version
with actuator KBAD 1690
39
32
35°
35°
View from the top
Cover plate
24
A
A
Hole pattern
12
3,1
1,6
19
A-A
1 / 147
1
Double-handle controller
D64 / DD64
page 63
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The double-handle controller D64/DD64 is available in either single-axis or multi-axis
options and is a robust controller used commonly in electro-hydraulic applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The double-handle controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /
vessels, UV radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life D64 10 million operating cycles
Mechanical life DD64 20 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54 front
D64 S5 Q / Q – 01 Z P + 03A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Basic unit
D64
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Grip- control handle left
Q T-grip
Grip- control handle right
Q T-grip
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
01 2 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Axis 2 (direction 3-4)
03A 6 contacts (4A 250V AC15)
R Friction brake
C Opto-electronical encoder
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
P134 Potentiometer T396 2x5kOhm
Description axis 2 (direction 3-4)
A110 Arrangement MSP 24-0
C01 OEC 2-1-1
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
Double-handle controller
D64 / DD64
Combination possibilities with our handles
page 64
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
D64 S5 Q / Q – 01 Z P + 03 A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Basic unit
D64 Identification of the installation variants with
Reinforced version switching directions:
DD64
Control-handle long*
Standard 180mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only in combination with knob!
Grip- control handle left
Knob
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
DV Flush push button
Q T-grip
QM T-grip with mechanical zero interlock
QMH T-grip with mechanical zero interlock + signal contact
QH T-grip + signal button
QD T-grip + push button side
B10 Palm grip B10… (see page 163)
Grip- control handle right
Knob
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
DV Flush push button
Q T-grip
QM T-grip with mechanical zero interlock
QMH T-grip with mechanical zero interlock + signal contact
QH T-grip with signal button
QD T-grip push button side
B10… Palm grip B10… (see page 163)
1
2
3
4
3-4
D64 / DD64
B10
p. 163
1
Double-handle controller
D64 / DD64
page 65
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Axis 2: direction 3-4
(Standard contacts gold plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – see arrangement on page 131
02 4 contacts e.g.
03 6 contacts A980 MS00
04 8 contacts A05 MS21
05 10 contacts A0500 MS21-00
06 12 contacts A110 MS24-0
A = Silver contacts (4A 250V AC15) A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Encoder C… Encoder see page 137
D64 S5 Q / Q – 01 Z P + 03 A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contacts – see arrangement page 131
02 4 contacts e.g.
03 6 contacts A980 MS00
04 8 contacts A05 MS21
05 10 contacts A0500 MS21-00
06 12 contacts A110 MS24-0
A = Silver contact (4A 250V AC15) A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Encoder C… Encoder see page 137
If both axis identical, it`s enough to describe one axis!
Example: A05P134 + A05P134 => A05P134
D64 S5 Q / Q – 01 Z P + 03 A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
1
Double-handle controller
D64 / DD64
D64 S5 Q / Q – 01 Z P + 03 A R C – A05 P134 + A110 C01 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Indicating labels
Indicating labels engraved
page 66
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Double-handle controller
D64 / DD64
page 67
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
To build in:
Direction 1-2
Direction 3-4
max. 4
A
80
92
180
77
25
T MN
H M
MP
Cover plate
CAGE CLAMP®
connection
max. 2,5mm²
IP 54
IP 00
Potentiometer
T 396
96
30 B
80 80
5,5
80
80
Hole pattern
OEC-mounting
40° 40°
40° 40°
56
28
122
180
T – grip
D = Push button
1 / 161
Type No. of
contacts Dim. A Dim. B
01 2 119 82
02 4 131 94
03 6 144 107
04 8 156 119
05 10 169 132
06 12 181 144
1
Double-handle controller
D8
page 68
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The double-handle controller D8 is a robust switching device for the hoisting applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The double-handle controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels,
UV radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life D8 8 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54 front
D8 S5 Q / Q – 2ZP + 3 RP – B – A05 P184 + A050 P184 – E9012 – S… – X
Basic unit
D8
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Grip- control-handle left
Q T-grip
Grip- control-handle right
Q T-grip
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
2 2 contacts (1,5A 24V DC13)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Axis 2 (direction 3-4)
3 3 contacts (1,5A 24V FC13)
R Friction brake
P Potentiometer
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
P184 Potentiometer T301 2x5kOhm
Description axis 2 (direction 3-4)
A050 Arrangement MSP21-0
P184 Potentiometer T301 2x5kOhm
Interface
E9012 Potentiometer output for proportional valve PVG32
Plug connector
S… Standard plug connector (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
Double-handle controller
D8
page 69
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
D8 S5 Q / Q – 2 Z P + 3 R P – B – A05 P184 + A050 P184 – E9012 – X
Basic unit
D8
Control-handle extended*
Standard 160mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only in combination with knob!
Grip- control-handle left
Knob
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
Q T-grip
QD T-grip with push button side
B10… Palm grip B10… (see page 163)
Grip- control-handle right
Knob
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
Q T-grip
QD T-grip with push button side
B10… Ball handle B10… (see page 163)
D8 S5 Q / Q – 2 Z P + 3 R P – B A05 P184 + A050 P184 – E9012 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left
1 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts e.g.
3 3 contacts A98
A05
A050
A99 contact – arrangement for customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P181 T301 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P182 T301 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P183 T301 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P184 T301 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P185 T301 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V / 4,5…2,5…0,5V
1
2
3
4
D8
1
Double-handle controller
D8
Combination possibilities with our handles
page 70
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
If both axis identical, it`s enough to describe one axis!
Example:…A05P184 + A05P184 => A05P184
D8 S5 Q / Q – 2 Z P + 3 R P – B A05 P184 + A050 P184 – E9012 – X
Axis 2: direction 3-4
1 1 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts e.g.
3 3 contacts A98
A05
A050
A99 contact – arrangement for customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P181 T301 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P182 T301 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P183 T301 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P184 T301 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P185 T301 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V / 4,5…2,5…0,5V
D8 S5 Q / Q – 2 Z P + 3 R P – B A05 P184 + A050 P184 – E9012 – X
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Interface
E901 1 Potentiometer output for proportional valve PVG32 0,25…0,5…0,75Us 1 axis
2 2 axis
Special model
X Special / customer specified
B10
p. 163
1
Double-handle controller
D8
page 71
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
To build in:
Direction 1-2
Direction 3-4
90
(Cover housing)
10,5
A 160
T
H M
Cable outlet
28
123
160
123
100
92
M6
76,5
Hole pattern
30° 30°
30° 30°
1 / 163
(According to board)
IP 54
IP 00
Cover plate
T – grip
D= Push button
1
Double-handle controller
D85
page 72
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The double-handle controller D85 is a robust switching device for hoisting applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The double-handle controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels,
UV radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life D85 8 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54 front
Example
D85 S5 Q / Q – Z + R – B – E… – S.. – X
Basic unit
D85
Control-handle extended
Standard 160mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only available in combination with handle!
Grip- control-handle left
Knob
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
Q T-grip
QD T-grip with push button side
B10… Palm grip B10… (see page 163)
Grip- control-handle right
See grip-control-handle left
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
Axis 2: direction 3-4 left
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
1
Double-handle controller
D85
page 73
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
D85 S5 Q / Q – Z + R – B – E… – S… – X
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Interface (description see following pages)
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
E3xx CAN-interface
E4xx CANOpen Safety
E5xx Profibus DP interface
E6xx Profinet
E7xx Profinet safe
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special/ customer specified
1
Double-handle controller
D85
page 74
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Digital output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
2 axis E001 2
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals per axis
2 Achsen E104 2
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
2 axis E112 2
0…5…10V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage
11,5 – 32V DC
2 axis E132 2
10…0…10V + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC,
sensor redundant with error monitoring and error signal
2 axis E136 2
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual *􀈻 1
Dual *􀈻 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 4
*􀈻 not combinable with output E136X
Single *􀈼 5
Single with dead zone *􀈼 6
*􀈼 not combinable with output E112X and E132X
Digital output signals:
Output signals standard: 0
Voltage output with other value on request! Direction signals and zero position signals 1,5A 24VDC 1
1
Double-handle controller
D85
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Mounting depth A 85mm
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
2 axis E206 2
20…0…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
2 axis E208 2
4…12…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
2 axis E214 2
20…4…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
2 axis E216 2
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/- 3° 6
Digital output signals:
Output signals standard: 0
Direction signals and zero position signals 1,5A 24VDC 1
Current output with other value on request!
CAN
Supply voltage 9-36V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA
External digital output for LEDs 5-30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A E3091: 85mm
E3091X: 105mm
E3101X – E3103X: 105mm
E3104X – E3105X: 125mm
Protocol CANOpen CiA DS 301 or SAE J 1939
Baud rate 125kBit/s to 1Mbit/s (standard 250 kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm without plug connector (additionally from 32 in-/outputs)
page 75
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Double-handle controller
D85
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CAN expansion stage 1 E309 1
– 7 analoge Joystickachsen
– 16 digitale Joystickfunktionen
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
CAN expansion stage 2 E310 1
– 10 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– 2 inputs for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
– 24 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 24 external digital inputs 4
– 32 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 32* external digital inputs 5
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
Main-axis with additional digital-/analog outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis
Additional analog outputs on request!
CANopen Safety
Supply voltage 9-36V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Zero position signal 100mA
External digital output for LEDs 5-30mA (depending on the number of LED`s)
Digital switching output (potential-free) 100mA
Mounting depth A E4091: 85mm
E4091X: 105mm
E4101X – E4103X: 105mm
E4104X – E4105X: 125mm
Protocol CAN Safety CIA 304
Baud rate 125kBit/s to 1MBit/s (Standard 250 kBits)
Output value 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 300mm with plug connector M12 (female)
External in-/outputs cable 300mm without plug connector
External in-/outputs cable 300mm without plug connector (additionally from 32 in-/outputs)
page 76
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Double-handle controller
D85
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
CANOpen safety expansion stage 1 E409 1
– 7 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
CANOpen safety expansion stage 2 E410 1
– 10 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 16* external digital inputs 3
– 24 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 24 external digital inputs 4
– 32 external LED-outputs (dimmable), 1 switching output (potential-free, 100mA), 32* external digital inputs 5
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
*With the use of capacitive sensor, the external digital inputs reduce by one input!
Main-axis with additional digital-/analog outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
Additional analog outputs on request!
Profibus DP
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 12MBit/s
Output value 0…128…255
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Profibus, cable 100mm with plug D-Sub 9
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
Profibus DP E501 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick function
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-output, 8 external digital input 2
– 16 external LED-output, 16 external digital input 3
External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
With additional contact equipment separately wired (not via profibus)
– 2 direction contacts + 1 zero position contact (not potential-free) per main-axis 1
– 1 zero position contact (potential-free) per main-axis 2
page 77
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Double-handle controller
D85
Profinet
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 100MBit/s
Output value 0…512…1023
Mounting depth A 105mm
Verdrahtung Profinet (1), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Profinet (2), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
Profinet E601 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 16 external digital inputs 3
*External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional signals separately wired (not via profinet)
– 2 direction signals + zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
Profinet Safe
Supply voltage 18-30V DC
Baud rate to 12MBit/s
Output value 0…512…1023
Mounting depth A 105mm
Wiring Profinet (1), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Profinet (2), cable 300mm with M12 plug connector (female)
Supply voltage (if applicable contact wiring) cable 12×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs, cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
External in-/outputs (additional at 16E/16A) cable 18×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
– 4 analog joystick axis E701 1
– 16 digital joystick functions
– Input for capacitive sensor
With additional external in-/outputs
– 8 external LED-outputs, 8 external digital inputs 2
– 16 external LED-outputs, 16 external digital inputs 3
*External LED-outputs can be used in the grip for LEDs
Main-axis with additional signals separately wired (not via profinet safe)
– 2 direction signals + zero position signal (potential-free) per main-axis 3
page 78
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Double-handle controller
D85
Other outputs
Voltage output for PVG32 0,25…0,5…0,75Us, power supply 9-32V DC
Wiring: 1. cable 14×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector
2. cable 14×0,25mm² 300mm long without plug connector (for axis 3+4 or grip function)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 axis E907 2
Main-axis with additional direction contacts per main-axis 4
8 Bit Gray-Code with direction signals per main-axis, supply voltage 9-36V DC
Wiring: 1. cable 37×0,14mm² 300mm long without plug connector (axis 1+2)
2. cable 37×0,14mm² 300mm long without plug connector (axis 3+4)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 axis E903 2
8 Bit Binär-Code with direction signals per main-axis, supply voltage 9-36V DC
Wiring: 1. cable 37×0,14mm² 300mm long without plug connector (axis 1+2)
2. cable 37×0,14mm² 300mm long without plug connector (axis 3+4)
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 axis E904 2
Attachments
Z01 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (male insert) with 2m cable 20201140
Z02 Mating connector (CAN) M12 (female contact) with 2m cable 20202298
Z03 Mating connector (Profibus) straight 22201440
Z04 Mating connector (Profibus) 90° angled 22201741
Z05 Mating connector (Profinet) M12 (male insert) with 2m cable 5300000222
page 79
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Double-handle controller
D85
page 80
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
To build in:
Direction 1-2
Direction 3-4
90
(Cover housing)
10,5
A 160
T
H
Cable outlet
28
123
160
123
100
92
M6
76,5
Hole pattern
30° 30°
30° 30°
1 / D85
(According
to board)
IP 54
IP 00
Cover plate
T – grip
D= Push button
1
Double-handle controller
D3
page 81
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The double-handle controller D3 is a robust switching device for nautical navigation
applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The double-handle controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels,
UV radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life D3 12 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP66 front
D3 S5 Q / Q – 2 R P + 3 R P – B – A05 P484 + A05 P484 – E1292 – S… – X
Basic unit
D3
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Grip- control handle left
Q T-grip
Grip- control handle right
Q T-grip
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
2 2 contacts (1,5A 24V DC13)
R Friction brake
P Potentiometer
Axis 2 (direction 3-4)
3 3 contacts (1,5A 24V DC13)
R Friction brake
P Potentiometer
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
P484 Potentiometer T318 2x5kOhm
Description axis 2 (direction 3-4)
A050 Arrangement MSP21-0
P484 Potentiometer T318 2x5kOhm
Interface
E1292 Voltage output 0…5…10V
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
1
Double-handle controller
D3
Combination possibilities with our handles
page 82
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
D3 S5 Q / Q – 2 R P + 3 R P – B – A05 P484 + A050 P484 – E1292 – X
Basic unit
D3 Identification of the installation variants with switching directions:
Control-handle extended*
Standard 148mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only available in combination with handle!
Grip-control-handle left
Knob
D Push button
Q T-grip
QD T-grip with push button side
Grip-control-handle right
Knob
D Push button
Q T-grip
QD T-grip with push button side
D3 S5 Q / Q – 2 R P + 3 R P – B – A05 P484 + A050 P484 – E1292 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left
1 1 contact Standard contact- arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts e.g.
3 3 contacts A98 MS0
A05 MS21
A050 MS21-0
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
R Friction brake
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer and (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P484 T318 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V / 4,5…2,5…0,5V
1 3
2 4
D3
B10
p. 163
1
Double-handle controller
D3
page 83
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
If both axis identical, it`s enough to describe one axis!
Example: …A05P214 + A05P214 => A05P214
D3 S5 Q / Q – 2 R P + 3 R P – B – A05 P484 + A050 P484 – E1292 – X
Axis 2: direction 3-4 left
1 1 contact Standard contact- arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts e.g.
3 3 contacts A98 MS0
A05 MS21
A050 MS21-0
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
R Friction brake
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P484 T318 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V/4,5…2,5…0,5V
D3 S5 Q / Q – 2 R P + 3 R P – B – A05 P484 + A050 P484 – E1292 – X
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Interface (description the following pages)
Potentiometer output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Voltage outputs
Supply voltage 11,5-32V DC
Wiring Cable 300mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…5…10V per axis
1 axis E129 1
2 axis 2
10…0…10V per axis
1 axis E141 1
2 axis 2
-10…0…+10V per axis
1 axis E140 1
2 axis 2
Voltage output with other value on request!
1
Double-handle controller
D3
page 84
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Current outputs
Supply voltage 18-36V DC
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
4…12…20mA per axis
1 axis E209 1
2 axis 2
20…4…20mA per axis
1 axis E217 1
2 axis 2
1
Double-handle controller
D3
page 85
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
120
80
67,5 86
26
60°
60°
Cable import
Filter plug
IP 66
IP 00
Cover plate
80 96,5
103 148
101
16
25
Adjusting screw
for friction brake
157
154
Knob solid
D= Push button
6
100
84
82
Hole pattern
T- grip
D=Push button
Direction 1-2 Direction 3-4
1 / 165
S ingle-axis controller
S1
1
page 86
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The single-axis controller S1 is a robust switching device for remote control and
electro-hydraulic applications.
The modular design of the switching device is universally applicable.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S1 6 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
S1 T – 2 Z P – A05 P374 – X
Basic unit
S1 1-axis
Grip / palm grip
T Dead man
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
2 2 contacts (1,5A 24V DC13)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
P374 Potentiometer T 375 2x5kOhm
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
Single-axis controller
S1
1
page 87
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S1 T – 2 Z P – A05 P374 – X
Basic unit
S1 1-axis
Grip / palm grip
Knob (standard)
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
D Push button
GS8 Knob GS8
S1 T – 2 Z P – A05 P374 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left
1 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts z.B.
3 3 contacts A05 MS21
4 4 contacts A050 MS21-0
A060 MS22-0
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return (included in basic unit!)
R Friction brake
P Potentiometer P372 T375 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P374 T375 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P274 T430 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
With direction track
S1 T – 2 Z P – A05 P374 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Single-axis controller
S1
1
2 24
57
25°
25° Knob GS8
25
21 20
63,50 63
max. 2
18,5 18,5
R14,5
12
20 20
4,5
Hole pattern
Cover plate IP 65
Potentiometer
T 375 / T 432
IP 00
Knob solid GK4
44
52
33 26
59
30
58
15
T = Dead man’s button
1 / 181
page 88
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S11
Identification of the installation variants with switching directions:
Example
1
2
S11
1
page 89
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The single-axis controller S11 is a hall sensor switching device designed for electrohydraulic
and remote controlled hydraulic.
The modular design of the switching device is universally applicable.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S11 6 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
S11 T – Z – E… – S… – X
Basic unit
S11 1-axis
Grip / palm grip
Knob (standard)
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
D Push button
GS8 Knob GS8
Z Spring return (included in basic unit!)
R Friction brake
Interface (description on the following page)
E0xx Digital output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Single-axis controller
S11
Digital Output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
Cable 500mm long with plug (male)
1 axis E001 1
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals per axis
1 axis E104 1
2 axis 2
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32V)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E112 1
0…5…10V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC
1 axis E132 1
10…0…10V + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC, sensor
redundant with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E136 1
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual *􀈻 1
Dual *􀈻 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 4
*􀈻 not combinable with output E136X
Single *􀈼 5
Single with dead zone *􀈼 6
*􀈼 not combinable with output E112X and E132X
Voltage output with other value on request!
1
page 90
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S11
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E206 1
20…0…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E208 1
4…12…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E214 1
20…4…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E216 1
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/-3° 6
Voltage output with other value on request!
1
page 91
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S11
1
page 92
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
25°
25°
Knob GS8
25
63
max. 2
52,3
18,5 18,5
R14,5
12
20 20
4,5
Hole pattern
Cover plate IP 65
IP 00
Knob solid GK4
44
52
58,1
30
58
15
T = Dead man’s button
1 / S11
Single-axis controller
S14
1
2
1
page 93
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S14L S8 T – 01ZC – A05 C61 – X
Basic unit
S14L
Control-handle extended
S8 +20mm
Grip / palm grip
T Dead man
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
01 2 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
C Mechanical encoder
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
C61 Mechanical encoder MEC 1-2
Special model
X Special / customer specified
S14L S8 T – 01ZC – A05 C61 – X
Basic unit
S14L 1-axis left
S14R 1-axis right
Control-handle extended
Standard Identification of the installation
S8 +20mm variants with switching directions:
Grip / palm grip
Knob (standard)
M Mechanical zero interlock
MH Mechanical zero interlock + signal contact
T Dead man
H Signal button
GK1 Knob 42mm
GK1M Mechanical zero interlock
GK1MN Mechanical zero interlock (push down)
GK1T Dead man
GK1H Signal button
S14
The single-axis controller S14 is a designed hall sensor switching device for
electro-hydraulic and remote controlled hydraulic.
The modular design of the switching device is universally applicable.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S14 6 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Example
Single-axis controller
S14
1
page 94
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S14L S8 T – 01ZC – A05 C61 – X
GK1MH Mechanical zero interlock + signal contact
GK1D Push button
GK1DV Flush push button
GS9 Hall-twist grip with spring return
GS9-D Hall-twist grip with spring return and push button on top
B … Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
Attention! The single-axis controller S14 is not suited for big palm grip (B3, B7/B8, B9…)!
S14L S8 T – 01ZC – A05 C61 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left / direction 5-6 right
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts z.B.
03 6 contacts A05 MS21
A0500 MS21-00
A110 MS24-0
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return (included in basic unit!)
R Friction brake
C Mechanical encoder C61 MEC 1-2
EA/02-10 l max. 1mA
Potentiometer track 2x10kOhm
Direction track Arrangement MS26-0
C62 MEC 1-7
EA/10-10 l max. 1mA
Potentiometer track 2x5kOhm
Direction track Arrangement MS26-0-1
C66 MEC 1-10
EA/17-10 l max. 1mA
Potentiometer track 2×1,5kOhm
Direction track Arrangement MS21-0+MS21
C63 MEC 1-6
EA/09-10
6 Bit Gray Code
C64 MEC 1-6-5
ER/36-10 Us= 18-30V
Current output 20…4…20mA
C65 MEC 1-6-8
ER/ 36-10 Us= 18-30V
Current output 20…0…20mA
C67 MEC 1-6-9
ER/36-11 Us= 18-30V
Voltage output 10…0…10V
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…5,4V / 4,5…2,5…0,5V
S14L S8 T – 01ZC – A05 C61 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Single-axis controller
S14
1 42
3,5
51
40
Hole pattern
Knob solid GK
for MN, MP
Twist grip
with Push button
the max. 4
8
56 60
25
50
40°
40°
CAGE CLAMP® connection
max. 1,5mm²
Mechanical
encoder
Board with solderor
plug terminal
Cover plate IP 65
IP 00
T
H M
71
40°
40°
40
54
52
B
B
28,5
32
Twist grip
28,5
37,5
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
1 / 143
Type No. of
contacts Dim. B
01 2 36
02 4 45
03 6 54
page 95
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S2 / SS2 / S21
Example
1
page 96
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The single-axis controller S2/SS2 is a robust switching device for remote controlled
and electrohydraulic applications.
The modular design of the switching device is universally applicable.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S2 / S21 6 million operating cycles
Mechanical life SS2 10 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
S2L S5 T – 02 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Basic unit
S2L left
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Grip / palm grip
T Dead man
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
02 3 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A050 Arrangement MSP21
P134 Potentiometer T396 2x5kOhm
Special model
X Special / customer specified
S2L S5 T – 02 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Basic unit
S2L Single-axis controller left Identification of the installation variants
S2R Single-axis controller right with switching directions:
S21L Single-axis controller left with flange 96x96mm
S21R Single-axis controller right with flange 96x96mm
Reinforced version
SS2L Single-axis controller left
SS2R Single-axis controller right
SS21L Single-axis controller left with flange 96x96mm
SS21R Single-axis controller right with flange 96x96mm
1
2
1-2
left
5
6
5-6
right
Single-axis controller
S2 / SS2 / S21
Combination possibilities with our handles
1
page 97
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S2L S5 T – 02 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Control-handle extended
Standard
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only possible in combination with handle!
Grip / palm grip
Knob (standard)
M Mechanical zero interlock
MN Mechanical zero interlock (push down)
T Dead man
MT Mechanical zero interlock + dead man
H Signal button
MH Mechanical zero interlock + signal button
D Push button
MD Mechanical zero interlock + push button
DV Flush push button
MDV Mechanical zero interlock + flush push button
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
S2L S5 T – 02 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left / direction 5-6 right
02 3 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
03 5 contacts z.B.
04 7 contacts A98 MS0
05 9 contacts A05 MS21
A0500 MS21-00
A110 MS24-0
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Encoder C… Encoder see page 137
B1 B5 B6 B10 B22 B24 B29
p. 147 p. 154 p. 156 p. 163 p. 169 p. 173 p. 179
Single-axis controller
S2 / SS2 / S21
1
page 98
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S2L S5 T – 02 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X1 Microswitch (MZT 1) positively driven NC contact
Attachments
Indicating labels
Indicating labels with engraving
Single-axis controller
S2 / SS2
1
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
24 21
88
max. 4
120
14
T MN
H M
Cover plate
Potentiometer
T 396
IP 54
IP 00
42
37,5°
37,5°
90
80
45
B
20,5
3,20
36,5 ±0,2
Hole pattern
145
35
Palm grip B5
B5 T = Dead man’s button
1 / 201
Type No. of
contacts Maß B
02 3 62
03 5 72
04 7 83
05 9 93
page 99
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S21
1
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
24 28 18
90
max. 4
120
T MN
H M
Cover plate
Potentiometer
T 396
IP 54
IP 00
42
37,5°
37,5°
90
B
96
145
35
5,50
72
80
30
30
3,50
Hole pattern
Palm grip B5
B5 T = Dead man’s button
1 / 203
Type No. of
contacts Maß B
02 3 62
03 5 72
04 7 83
05 9 93
page 100
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S22 / SS22
Example
1
page 101
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The single-axis controller S2/SS2 is a robust switching device for remote controlled
and electrohydraulic applications.
The modular design of the switching device is universally applicable.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S22 6 million operating cycles
Mechanical life SS22 10 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
S22L S5 T – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Basic unit
S22L left
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Grip / palm grip
T Dead man
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
3 3 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A050 Arrangement MSP21
P134 Potentiometer T396 2x5kOhm
Special model
X Special / customer specified
S22L S5 T – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Basic unit
S22L Single-axis controller left Identification of the installation variants
S22R Single-axis controller right with switching directions:
Reinforced version
SS22L Single-axis controller left
SS22R Single-axis controller right
Control-handle extended
Standard
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
1
2
1-2
S22L / SS22L
5
6
5-6
S22R / SS22R
Single-axis controller
S22 / SS22
Combination possibilities with our handles
1
page 102
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S22L S5 T – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Grip / palm grip
Knob (standard)
M Mechanical zero interlock
MN Mechanical zero interlock (push down)
T Dead man
MT Mechanical zero interlock + dead man
H Signal button
MH Mechanical zero interlock + signal button
D Push button
MD Mechanical zero interlock + push button
DV Flush push button
MDV Mechanical zero interlock + flush push button
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 147)
S22L S5 T – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left / direction 5-6 right
1 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts z.B.
3 3 contacts A98 MS0
4 4 contacts A05 MS21
A0500 MS21-00
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Codierer C…Encoder see page 137
B5
p. 154
Single-axis controller
S22 / SS22
1
page 103
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S22L S5 T – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X1 Switching run 2-0-2
Attachments
Indicating labels
Indicating labels with engraving
Single-axis controller
S22 / SS22
1
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
88
max. 4
120
16 14
T MN
H M
Cover plate
Potentiometer
T 396
IP 54
IP 00
42
37,5°
37,5°
80
45
B
90
20,5
3,20
36,5 ±0,2
Hole pattern
145
35
Palm grip B5
B5 T = Dead man’s button
1 / 205
Type No. of
contacts Dim. B
1 1 25
2 2 31
3 3 36
4 4 42
page 104
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S23
1
page 105
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The single-axis controller S23 is a robust switching device for shipbuilding and electrohydraulic
applications. The modular design of the switching device is universally
applicable. The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /
vessels, UV radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S23 6 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
S23L S5 M – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Basic unit
S23L left
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Grip / palm grip
M Mechanical zero interlock
Axis 1 (direction 1-2)
3 3 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A050 Arrangement MSP21-0
P134 Potentiometer T396 2x5kOhm
Special model
X Special / customer specified
S23L S5 M – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Basic unit
S23L left Identification of the installation variants
S23R right with switching directions:
Control-handle extended
Standard 140mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
1
2
1-2
S23L
5
6
5-6
Example
S23R
Single-axis controller
S23
1
page 106
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S23L S5 M – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Grip / palm grip
Knob (standard)
M Mechanical zero interlock
Q T-grip
QM T-grip with mechanical zero interlock
S23L S5 M – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left / direction 5-6 right
1 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts z.B.
3 3 contacts A98 MS0
4 4 contacts A05 MS21
A0500 MS21-00
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C Encoder C… Encoder see page 137
S23L S5 M – 3 Z P – A050 P134 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Single-axis controller
S23
M = mechanische
Nullstellenverriegelung T – Griff
42
70 140
18 16 B
36
M
Einbauplatte IP 65
IP 00
Potentiometer T 130
90
37,5°
37,5°
84
122
57
72
98,5
82
5,5
oder M5
Einbauöffnung
80
28
140
1 / 209
Form Kontaktzahl
Maß B
1 1 25
2 2 31
3 3 36
4 4 42
1
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock T – grip
42
70 140
14 16 B
36
M
Cover plate IP 65
IP 00
Potentiometer T 396
90
37,5°
37,5°
84
122
57
72
98,5
82
5,5
or M5
Hole pattern
80
28
140
1 / 209
Type No. of
contacts Dim. B
1 1 25
2 2 31
3 3 36
4 4 42
page 107
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S ingle-axis controller
S26
1
2
1
page 108
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The single-axis controller S26 is a hall sensor switching device designed for
electro-hydraulic and remote controlled hydraulic.
The modular design of the switching device is universally applicable.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S26 6 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
S26 T – Z – E… – S… – X
Basic unit
S26 1-axis
Grip / palm grip
Knob
M Mechanical zero interlock
T Dead man
H Signal button
D Push button
B… Palm grip B… (see page palm grip 146)
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
Interface (description on the following pages)
E0xx Digital output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
S26
Example
Identification of the installation variants
with switching directions:
Single-axis controller
S26
Combination possibilities with our handles
1
page 109
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Digital output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E001 1
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals per axis
1 axis E104 1
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32V)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E112 1
0…5…10V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC
1 axis E132 1
10…0…10V + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC,
sensor redundant with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E136 1
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual *􀈻 1
Dual *􀈻 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 4
*􀈻 not combinable with output E136X
Single *􀈼 5
Single with dead zone *􀈼 6
Voltage output with other value on request! *􀈼 not combinable with output E112X and E132X
B5
p. 154
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E206 1
20…0…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant,
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E208 1
4…12…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E214 1
20…4…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E216 1
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/-3° 6
Current output with other value on request!
Single-axis controller
S26
1
page 110
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S26
1
T = Dead man’s button
H = Signal button
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock
42
Knob solid
D= Push button
max. 4
74 113,5
T MN
H M
Cover plate IP 54
IP 00
42
70
37,5°
37,5°
45
80
22,50
20,5 3,20
36,5 ±0,2
Hole pattern
145
35
Palm grip B5
B5 T = Dead man’s button
1 / S26
page 111
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S27
1
2
5
6
Identification of the installation variants
with switching directions:
1
page 112
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
S27L M – Z – E… – S… – X
Basic unit
S27L left
S27R right
Grip / palm grip
Knob (standard)
M Mechanical zero interlock
Q T-grip
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
Interface (description on the following pages)
E0xx Digital output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specific
The single-axis controller S27 is a hall sensor switching device designed for
electro-hydraulic and remote controlled hydraulic.
The modular design of the switching device is universally applicable.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S27 6 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
S27 left
Example
S27 right
Single-axis controller
S27
Digital Output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E001 1
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals per axis
1 axis E104 1
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32V)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis
1 axis E112 1
0…5…10V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC
1 axis E132 1
10…0…10V + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC, sensor
redundant with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E136 1
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual *􀈻 1
Dual *􀈻 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 4
*􀈻 not combinable with output E136X
Single *􀈼 5
Single with dead zone *􀈼 6
*􀈼 not combinable with output E112X and E132X
Voltage output with other value on request!
1
page 113
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S27
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E206 1
20…0…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E208 1
4…12…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E214 1
20…4…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) per axis, sensor redundant
with error monitoring and error signal
1 axis E216 1
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/-3° 6
Current output with other value on request!
1
page 114
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S27
1
M = Latch for mechanical
zero interlock T – grip
42
49 140
36
M
Cover plate IP 65
IP 00
70
37,5°
37,5°
84
122
57
72
98,5
82
5,5
or M5
Hole pattern
80
28
140
1 / S27
page 115
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S3
The single-axis control S3 is a rugged switching device for hoisting applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S3 12 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP66 front
S3L S5 Q – 2 R P – B – A05 P484 – E1291 – S… – X
Basic unit
S3L Single-axis controller left
Control-handle extended
S5 -20mm
Grip- control-handle left
Q T-grip
Axis 1
2 2 contacts (1,5A 24V DC13)
R Friction brake
P Potentiometer
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Description axis 1 (direction 1-2)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
P484 Potentiometer T318 2x5kOhm
Interface
E1291 Voltage output 0…5…10V
Plug connectors
S.. Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
1
page 116
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Example
Single-axis controller
S3
S3L S5 Q – 2 R P – B – A05 P484 – E1291 – S… – X
Basic unit
S3L Single-axis controller, control-handle left Identification of the installation variants
S3R Single-axis controller, control-handle right with switching directions:
Control-handle extended*
Standard 148mm
S5 -20mm
S8 +20mm
*Only possible in combination with handle!
Grip
Knob
D Push button
Q T-grip
QD T-grip with push button side
S3L S5 Q – 2 R P – B – A05 P484 – E1291 – S… – X
Axis 1: direction 1-2 left
1 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts z.B.
3 3 contacts A98
A05
A050
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P484 T318 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V / 4,5…2,5…0,5V
1
2
S3L
3
4
S3R
S3L S5 Q – 2 R P – B – A05 P484 – E1291 – S… – X
Cover housing
B Cover housing
Interface (description on the following pages)
Potentiometer output
E1xx Voltage output
E2xx Current output
Special model
X Special / customer specified
1
page 117
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S3
Voltage output
Supply voltage 11,5-32V DC
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
…5…10V per axis
1 axis E112 1
10…0…10V per axis
1 axis E132 1
-10…0…+10V per axis
1 axis E136 1
Voltage output with other value on request!
Current output
Supply voltage 18-36V DC
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
4…12…20mA per axis
1 axis E209 1
20…4…20mA per axis
1 axis E217 1
1
page 118
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S3
1
120
80
60°
60°
26
67,5 86
Filter plug Cable entry
IP 66
IP 00
Cover plate
96
101
25
103 156
Adjustment screw
for friction brake
154
Knob solid
D= Push button
6
100
84
82
Hole pattern
T – grip
D= Push button
1 / 213
page 119
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Single-axis controller
S9
1
page 120
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The single-axis controller S9 is a hallsensor switching device designed for electrohydraulic
applications.
Due to its small size, the S9 is particularly suitable for installation in our ball handles.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life S9 5 million operating cycles
Operating force 1,6 to 3,5N
Supply voltage 5V DC stabilized
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP67
S9 – E10311 – X
Basic unit
S9
Interface
Voltage output
E 1031 0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant at Ub=5V 1 axis
characteristic: 1 = Inverse dual, 2 = Dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
Single-axis controller
S9
1
23,5
max. 4
12
32
25°
25°
19,5
31
Rocker
Cover plate
23,5
22,5
13
R1,5
17,9
+0,1
20,6
+0,1
Hole pattern
(installed from the top)
1
2
23,5
max. 4
16,2
25°
25°
15
31
Rocker
Cover plate
R3,5
3
27,2 ±0,1
20,2
+0,1
19,2
+0,1
Hole pattern
(installed from below)
chamfering
Ø5,8 x 90°
22,5
13
1
2
Installed from the top
Installed from below
1/223
page 121
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Thumbwheel
S12
1
page 122
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The thumbwheel S12 is designed for electro-hydraulic applications.
By the combination of different lighting options and colours you can customise the
appearance.
Technical data
Mechanical life S12 5 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +85°C
Degree of protection IP67
Functional safety PLd (EN ISO 13849) possible
S12 – 2 – 1 -1 -E1031 -X
Basic unit
S12 Thumbwheel S12
Illumination
1 Unlighted
2 Functional lighting 2-colour red-green (separate switchable) U_LED= 4,5-5,5V
3 Functional lighting 2-colour white-red (separate switchable) U_LED= 4,5-5,5V
4 Functional lighting 2-colour white-green (separate switchable) U_LED= 4,5-5,5V
Actuator colour
1 Black
2 Grey
3 Blue
4 Red
5 Yellow
Mechanical function
1 T-0-T
2 R-0-R
3 T-0-R
4 R-0-T
5 R-R
6 R-R-0-R-R
Interface
E1031 0,5…2,5…4,5 redundant by Ub=5V
1 Output option inverse dual
2 Output option dual
Special model
X Special / customer specifi ed
Thumbwheel
S12
1
13
2
14,5
1,5
28,93
9,9
19
2,7
19,6
1,5
7,7 14,5
27,5
±30°
15
22,6
15,4
S12 with LED
SR1
SR2
20
S12 with mounting frame
S12 without mounting frame
page 123
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Control switch
N6
1
page 124
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The control-switch N6 is a rugged switching device for hoisting applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The single-axis controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life N6 10 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
N6 – DG – 01 Z P – A05 P134 – X
Basic unit
N6 incl. ISO-front plate 88x88mm
Grip
DG Twist grip
Axis 1 (direction 2-4)
01 2 contacts (2A 250V AC15)
Z Spring return
P Potentiometer
Description axis 1 (direction 3-4)
A05 Arrangement MSP21
P134 Potentiometer T396 2x5kOhm
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
Control switch
N6
1
page 125
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
N6 – DG – 01 Z P – A05 P134 – X
Basic unit
N6 incl. ISO-front plate 88x88mm
N6A incl. ISO-front plate 88x88mm, IP65 (front)
Grip
KN Knob
HG Ball grip
DG Twist grip
Axis 1: direction 3-4
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts z.B.
03 6 contacts A980 MS00
04 8 contacts A05 MS21
05 10 contacts A0500 MS21-00
06 12 contacts A110 MS24-0
A = Silver contacts (4A 250V AC15) A99 contacts – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
C C… Encoder see page 137
N6 – DG – 01 Z P – A05 P134 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Indicating label
Indicating label with engraving
Control switch
N6
1
CAGE CLAMP®
connection max. 2,5mm²
25
A 44
48 33
25
45
Cover plate 1…5
Potentiometer
T 396
21
64
Ball – handle 108
44
50
Rotary mechanism
88,5
79
71
22,5
48
4,5
Hole pattern
Knob
1 / 231
IP 54
IP 00
Type No. of
contacts Dim. A Spring
return
01 2 53
+25
02 4 65
03 6 78
04 8 90
05 10 103
06 12 115
page 126
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Control switch
N9
1
page 127
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
N9 – 2 R P – A05 P134 – X
Basic unit
N9 Control switch with twist grip
Axis 1: direction 3-4
1 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts z.B.
A98 MS0
A05 MS21
A99 contacts – arrangement according customer request
R Friction brake (included in basic unit)
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
H Hall-Potentiometer E10311 0,5…2,5…4,5V / 4,5…2,5…0,5V
Special model
X Special / customer specified
The control-switch N9 is a rugged switching device for hoisting applications.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
Technical data
Mechanical life N9 10 million operating cycles
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Example
Control switch
N9
61
max. 6
27
30
38
Einbauplatte
R33,7
30,50
Einbauöffnung
N9
1
61
max. 6
27
30
38
Cover plate
R33,7
30,50
Hole pattern
N9
page 128
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Standard plug connector
Molex Micro-Fit 3.0 Suited for conductor cross-section 0,1 til 0,75mm²
S001 Male housing 4-pole
S002 Male housing 6-pole
S003 Male housing 8-pole
S004 Male housing 10-pole
S005 Male housing 12-pole
S006 Male housing 14-pole
S007 Male housing 18-pole
S008 Male housing 24-pole
S009 Female housing 4-pole
S010 Female housing 6-pole
S011 Female housing 8-pole
S012 Female housing 10-pole
S013 Female housing 12-pole
S014 Female housing 14-pole
S015 Female housing 18-pole
S016 Female housing 24-pole
Deutsch DTM Suited for conductor cross-section 0,25 til 1,5mm²
S017 Male housing 4-pole
S018 Male housing 6-pole
S019 Male housing 8-pole
S020 Male housing 10-pole
S021 Male housing 12-pole
S022 Female housing 4-pole
S023 Female housing 6-pole
S024 Female housing 8-pole
S025 Female housing 10-pole
S026 Female housing 12-pole
Deutsch DT Suited for conductor cross-section 0,25 til 2,0mm²
S027 Male housing 4-pole
S028 Male housing 6-pole
S029 Male housing 8-pole
S030 Male housing 10-pole
S031 Male housing 12-pole
S032 Female housing 4-pole
S033 Female housing 6-pole
S034 Female housing 8-pole
S035 Female housing 10-pole
S036 Female housing 12-pole
AMP CPC Suited for conductor cross-section 0,12 til 1,5mm²
S037 Male housing CPC 13 9-pole
S038 Male housing CPC 17 14-pole
S039 Male housing CPC 23 37-pole
S040 Female housing CPC 13 9-pole
S041 Female housing CPC 17 14-pole
S042 Female housing CPC 23 37-pole
1
page 129
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Standard plug connector
AMP Mini-Universal MATE-N-LOK Suited for conductor cross-section 0,12 til 1,5mm²
S043 Male housing 4-pole
S044 Male housing 6-pole
S045 Male housing 8-pole
S046 Male housing 10-pole
S047 Male housing 16-pole
S048 Female housing 4-pole
S049 Female housing 6-pole
S050 Female housing 8-pole
S051 Female housing 10-pole
S052 Female housing 16-pole
Phoenix Suited for conductor cross-section til 1,5mm²
S053 Male housing IC 2,5 8-pole with screw terminal
S054 Male housing IC 2,5 12-pole with screw terminal
S055 Male housing IC 2,5 14-pole with screw terminal
S056 Male housing IC 2,5 18-pole with screw terminal
S057 Female housing MSTB 2,5 8-pole with screw terminal
S058 Female housing MSTB 2,5 12-pole with screw terminal
S059 Female housing MSTB 2,5 14-pole with screw terminal
S060 Female housing MSTB 2,5 18-pole with screw terminal
1
page 130
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Potentiometer
MSP
M
A
S

E
Standard contact-arrangement
for master switch
Type Form
MS11
0 1
°3 0°3 A01
MS12
0 1 2
°3 0°3 ° ° A02 2 02
MS13
0 1 2 3
°3 0°3
°2 0°2 A03
°4 0°4
MS14
0 1 2 3 4
°3 0°3
A04
°2 0°2
°4 0°4
°6 0°6
MS21
1 0 1
°3 0°3 ° ° A05 5 05
MS22
2 1 0 1 2
°3 0°3
°5 0°5 A06
°2 0°2
MS212
2 1 0 1 2
°3 0°3
A07
°5 0°5
°2 0°2
°4 0°4
MS222
2 1 0 1 2
°3 0°3
A08
°5 0°5
°7 0°7
°9 0°9
MS213
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
°3 0°3
A10
°5 0°5
°2 0°2
°2 0 0 2° 0
°4 0°4
°4 0 0 4° 0
Type Form
MS24
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
°3 0°3
A11
°5 0°5
°2 0°2
°4 0°4
°6 0°6
MS214
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
°3 0°3
A12
°5 0°5
°2 0°2
°2 0 0 2° 0
°4 0°4
°4 0 0 4° 0
°6 6°0
°6 0 0 6° 0
MS224
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
°3 0°3
A13
°5 0°5
°2 0°2
°4 0°4
MS25
5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5
°3 0°3
A14
°5 0°5
°2 0°2
°4 0°4
°6 0°6
°8 0°8
MS26
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
°3 0°3
A15
°5 0°5
°2 0°2
°4 0°4
°6 0°6
°8 0°8
°1 0 ° 0 10
MS0
1 0 1
°0 1° A98
Special arrangement
Mechanical zero interlock
Front contact
0
°0 1° A…0
Mechanical zero interlock
Front contact
°0 1° A…1
2
1 5
3 4 7 8
2 6
left right
Deflection directions designated
DIN 15025
4
1
MS23
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
°3 0°3
A09
°5 0°5
°2 0°2
°4 0°4
Micro change over
contact for control
handle with dead
man`s button signal button
push button
contact 5 05 = direction1/4/5/8
contact 3 03 = direction 2/3/6/7
page 131
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
Technical data
page 132
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Utilization categories for control switches to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Type of
current
Utilization
category Typical examples of application Normal conditions of use
I= current made, Ic= current broken
Ie= rated operational current, U= voltage before make
Ue= rated operational voltage
Ur= recovery voltage
T 0,95= time in ms, to reach 95% of the steady-state
current. P= UE ∙ Ie= steady-state power consumption in
watts
Make
I U
— —
le Ue
cos
Breake
Ic Ur
— —
le Ue
cos
alternating
current
AC12
AC15
Control of resistive loads and solid state loads with
isolation by opto couplers control of a.c. electromagnetic
loads (> 72VA)
1
10
1
1
0,9
0,3
1
1
1
1
0,9
0,3
I
—
le
U
—
Ue
t 0,95
lc
—
le
Ur
—
Ue
t 0,95
Direct
current
DC 12
DC 13
Control of resistive loads and solid state loads with isolation
by opto couplers Control of d.c. electromagnets
1
1
1
1
1ms
6 ∙ P
1
1
1
1
1 ms
6 ∙ P
The value 6·P results from an empirical relationship with is found to represent most d.c. magnetic loads to an upper limit of P = 50 W viz
6·P = 300 ms. Loads having power consumption greater than 50 W are assumed to consist of smaller loads in parallel. Therefore 300 ms is to
be an upper limit, irrespective of the power consumption value.
Attach our
switching device
V6 N6
S6
N61 N62
VV6
DD64
V11 V5
S2-S23
VV5
SS2-SS21
Rated isolation voltage
Ui in Volt 250 250 250 250 250
Rated operational voltage
Ue in Volt 250 250 250 250 250
Rated operational current le
in Ampere AC 12 6 or 16 6 or 16 6 or 16 10 10
AC 15 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2
DC 12 24 V 6 8 6 8 6 8 4 4
48V 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2
110V 0,5 1 0,5 1 0,5 1 0,2 0,2
220V 0,1 0,5 0,1 0,5 0,1 0,5 0,1 0,1
Contacts gold-coated 24V 5mA 5mA 5mA 5mA 5mA
DC 13 24V 1 1 1 3 3
48V 0,5 0,5 0,5 1,5 1,5
110V 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,1 0,1
220V 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,05
Short-circuit-protection in Ampere
Fuse 9L
Circuit-breaker G-characteristic
6 16
6 16
6 6
6 16
6 16
6 16
10
10
10
10
Terminal screws
Plug-in connector
CAGE CLAMP® connection is a
registered trademarkt of WAGO
Kontakttechnik GmbH Germany
M 3,5
2,5mm²
M 3,5
2,5mm²
M 3,5
2,5mm²
M 3,5
6,3×0,8
M3,5
6,3×0,8
Conductor sizes in mm²
finely stranded with end steeves 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5
Mechanical life
in million (operation cycles)
max. switching frequency c/h 1000
10 20 10 6 10
Mechanical shock resistance
IEC 68-2-27 Shock-amplitude > 15 Shock duration 20ms
Clearances and creepage distances
IEC 947-1; 2.5.46.51
Overvoltage category III pollution grade 3
Degree of protection to
IEC/EN 60529
1. numerial protection of contact and
foreign bodies
2. numerial protection of water
IP00 No protection No protection
IP54 Protection deposits of dust Protection splashing of water
IP65 Protection complete of dust Protection hosed of water
IP66 Protection complete of dust Protection hosed strong of water
1
Technical data
page 133
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Attach our
switching device
V8 V85
D8
VV8 VV85
D3
S3
V10
V25
S1
V14
S14
V3 Dead man`s
button
signal button
push button
Rated isolation voltage
Ui in Volt 110 110 110 250 500 250
Rated operational voltage
Ue in Volt 110 110 110 250 350 250
Rated operational voltage le
in Ampere AC 12 2 2 2 6 16 6
AC 15 0,5 0,5 0,5 2 4 2
DC 12 24 V 2 2 2 6 8 4
48V 1 1 1 2 4 2
110V 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,5 1 0,2
220V 0,1 0,5 0,1
Contacts gold-coated 24V 5mA 5mA 5mA 5mA 5mA 5mA
DC 13 24V 1,5 1,5 1,5 1 1 3
48V 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1,5
110V 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,2 0,2 0,1
220V 0,05 0,05 0,05
Short-circuit-protection in Ampere
Fuse 9L
Circuit-breaker G-characteristic
44
44
44
66
16
16
66
Terminal screws
Plug-in connector
CAGE CLAMP® connection is a
registered trademarkt of WAGO
Kontakttechnik GmbH Germany
Solder terminal
M4
1,5mm²
M 3,5
6,3×0,8
6,3 x 0,8
Conductor sizes in mm²
finely stranded with end steeves 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1,5 1,5
Mechanical life
in million (operation cycles)
max. switching frequency c/h 1000
8 12 8 6 6 10
Mechanical shock resistance
IEC 68-2-27 Shock-amplitude > 15 Shock duration 20ms
Clearances and creepage distances
IEC 947-1; 2.5.46.51 Overvoltage category III pollution grade 3
Degree of protection to
IEC/EN 60529
1. numerial protection of contact
and foreign bodies
2. numerial protection of water
IP00 No protection No protection
IP54 Protection deposits of dust Protection splashing of water
IP65 Protection complete of dust Protection hosed of water
IP66 Protection complete of dust Protection hosed strong of water
2
with centre tap life
Hall 0,5…2,5…4,5V /
4,5…2,5…0,5V
Addition for Part No.
Typ
Capacity (W)
Imax wiper (mA)
Typ
Expansion
2×0,5kOhm
2x1kOhm
2x2kOhm
2x5kOhm
2x10kOhm
for mounting Part No.
on 1 2 3 4 5 Comment
V6 / VV6
D64 / DD64
V5 / VV5
V3
S2 / SS2
S6
N6
P7
P8
T1420 1,5 10 P44 ☐ x x x x x 524004400 ☐
T132 2,5 10 P05 ☐ x x x x x 524000500 ☐
T132 Öl 2,5 10 P06 ☐ x x x x 524000600 ☐
T178 1,5 10 P07 ☐ x x x 524000700 ☐ characteristic progressive
T238 1 10 P08 ☐ x x x x x*1 524000800 ☐ *¹ R= 2x 6,5 kOhm
T133 60 85 P10 ☐ x 524001000 ☐
T396 0,5 1 P13 ☐ x x x x x 524001300 ☐
T1350 Ex 0,5 1 P14 ☐ x x x x x 524001400 ☐
T1360 P43 x 5240043009
V8 / VV8
D8
P10
P11
P12
T239 1 10 P17 ☐ x x 524001700 ☐
T301 0,5 1 P18 ☐ x x x x 524001800 ☐
T426 0,5 1 P19 ☐ x x 524001900 ☐ with direction lines
T432 0,5 1 P20 ☐ x 524002000 ☐
T246 0,5 1 P21 ☐ x x x x 524002100 ☐
T362 0,5 1 P22 ☐ x x x 524002200 ☐
T1003 P42 x 5240042009
T1360 P43 x 5240043009
V10
S1
Palm handle
T321 1 10 P24 ☐ x 524002400 ☐
T320 0,5 1 P25 ☐ x x 524002500 ☐
T430 0,5 1 P27 ☐ x 524002700 ☐ with direction lines
T375 0,5 1 P37 ☐ x x 524003700 ☐
T997 P41 x 5240041009
V11 T316 1 10 P31 ☐ x*2 524003100 ☐ *² R= 2x 4kOhm
T365 0,5 1 P32 ☐ x x 524003200 ☐
D3
S3 T318 0,5 1 P48 ☐ x 524004800 ☐
Imax wiper (mA)
without centre tap life
Addition for Part
No.
for mounting
on
Typ
Capacity (W)
Typ
Expansion
0,5kOhm
1kOhm
2kOhm
5kOhm
10kOhm
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5 Commend
V6 / VV6
D64 / DD64
V5 / VV5
V3
S2 / SS2
S6
N6
P7 / P8
T1491 1,5 10 P46 ☐ x x x x x 524004600 ☐
T131 2,5 10 P03 ☐ x x x x x 524000300 ☐
T131 Oil 2,5 10 P04 ☐ x x x 524000400 ☐
T134 60 85 P11 ☐ x 524001100 ☐
T374 0,5 1 P12 ☐ x x x x x 524001200 ☐
V8 / VV8 /D8
P10/P11/P12
T244 0,5 1 P23 ☐ x x x 524002300 ☐
T397 0,5 1 P47 ☐ x x x 524004700 ☐
V10 / S1
Palm grip T337 0,5 1 P26 ☐ x x x x 524002600 ☐
GE1/GE2 PW70 5 30 P45 ☐ x x x 524004500 ☐
Potentiometer
with attach to our switching device
page 134
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Hall-Potentiometer
HG 2
Example
page 135
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The Hall-Potentiometer HG2 is distinguished by its precision and longevity.
Technical data
Mechanical life 10 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP67
HG2A – 60 – 6 – E10311 – X
Basic unit
HG2A Hall-Potentiometer HG2 Model A
HG2B Hall-Potentiometer HG2 Model B
Operating distance
0-359° possible
Example 60° => 60
Dead zone around the center position
0 No dead zone
Example +/-3° => 6
Interface
E1031 1 0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant counter-rotating Ub=4,75-5,25V DC
2 0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant co-rotating right-handed Ub=4,75-5,25V DC
3 0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant co-rotating left-handed Ub=4,75-5,25V DC
Special model
X Special / customer specified
2
Hall-Potentiometer
HG 2
M9
32,20
7,90 10,30
1
6
1,50
1,50
22,20
15,20
5
1,50
1
14,40
3
1,50
10
6
26
1,60
5
22,20
2,25
16,50
45°
5
1
HG2B
HG2A
page 136
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Opto-electronical encoder OEC 2 with digital output gray-/binär-cdode
Power supply 18-30V DC
Rotation angle Max. +/-150° (by 9 Bit 300°)
Digital output 8 Bit Gray-Code T359 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-1-1 C01 410g
8 Bit Binary-Code T359 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-2-1 C02 410g
6 Bit Gray-Code T359 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-3-1 C031 410g
6 Bit Gray-Code T359 Output characteristic quadratic OEC 2-3-2 C032 410g
6 Bit Binary-Code T359 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-4-1 C041 410g
6 Bit Binary-Code T359 Output characteristic quadratic OEC 2-4-2 C042 410g
9 Bit Gray-Code T384 Output characteristic linear one side clockwise OEC 2-5-4 C054 410g
9 Bit Gray-Code T384 Output characteristic linear one side anticlockwise OEC 2-5-5 C055 410g
9 Bit Binary-Code T384 Output characteristic linear one side clockwise OEC 2-6-4 C064 410g
9 Bit Binary-Code T384 Output characteristic linear one side anticlockwise OEC 2-6-5 C065 410g
6 Bit-type T359 8-Bit-type T359 9 Bit-type T384
PIN connection Colour-code PIN connection Colour-code PIN connection Colour-code
1 Not connected – 1 Not connected – 1 Not connected –
2 D4 brown 2 D6 brown 2 D6 brown
3 D3 green 3 D5 green 3 D5 green
4 D2 yellow 4 D4 yellow 4 D4 yellow
5 D1 grey 5 D3 grey 5 D3 grey
6 Not connected – 6 D2 pink 6 D2 pink
7 Not connected – 7 D1 blue 7 D1 blue
8 Housing 0V black 8 Housing 0V black 8 Housing 0V black
9 Input
18-30V DC red 9 Input
18-30V DC red 9 Input
18-30V DC red
10 Not connected – 10 Not connected – 10 Not connected –
11 Not connected – 11 Not connected – 11 Not connected –
12 Direction-signal left violet 12 Direction-signal left violett 12 Direction-signal left violett
13 Direction-signal grey grey-pink 13 Direction-signal right grey-pink 13 D9 grey-pink
14 D6 red-blue 14 D8 red-blue 14 D8 red-blue
15 D5 white-green 15 D7 white-green 15 D7 white-green
– Cable screen brown-green – Cable screen brown-green – Cable screen brown-green
Opto-electronic encoder
Output digital OEC 2
with attach to our switching device
6 Bit-type T359 8 Bit-type T359 9 Bit-type T384
page 137
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Opto-electronic encoder
digital OEC 2
with attach to our switching device
Opto-electronical encoder OEC 2 with voltage output
Power supply 18-30V DC
Scanning 6 Bit Gray-Code
Rotation angle Max. +/-150°
Voltage output 10…0…10V T366 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-3-1-1 C111 410g
10…0…10V T366 Output characteristic quadratic OEC 2-3-2-1 C112 410g
-10…0…+10V T367 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-3-1-2 C151 410g
-10…0…+10V T367 Output characteristic quadratic OEC 2-3-2-2 C152 410g
Voltage output
PIN connection Colour-code
1 Not connected –
2 Not connected –
3 Not connected –
4 Not connected –
5 Not connected –
6 Not connected –
7 Not connected –
8 Housing 0V blue
9 Input 18-30V DC brown
10 Not connected –
11 Voltage output green
12 Direction signal left yellow
13 Direction signal right grey
14 Not connected –
15 Not connected –
– Cable screen white
6 Bit-type T366 6 Bit-type T367
zero-point adjustable
directional-signal left directional-signal right
page 138
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Opto-electronic encoder
Output digital OEC 2
with attach to our switching device
Opto-electronical encoder OEC 2 with current output
Power supply 18-30V DC
Scanning 6 Bit Gray-Code
Rotation angle Max. +/-150°
Output current 20…4…20mA T368 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-3-1-5 C191 410g
20…4…20mA T368 Output characteristic quadratic OEC 2-3-2-5 C192 410g
20…0…20mA T368 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-3-1-8 C201 410g
20…0…20mA T368 Output characteristic quadratic OEC 2-3-2-8 C202 410g
-20…0…+20mA T369 Output characteristic linear OEC 2-3-1-6 C231 410g
-20…0…+20mA T369 Output characteristic quadratic OEC 2-3-2-6 C232 410g
Attachment
Plug with cable 14×0,25mm², 2000mm long, cable head open (for OEC 2 with digital outputs) 5300000495
Plug with cable 7×0,34mm², 2000mm long, cable head open (for OEC 2 with analog outputs) 5300000496
The OEC 2 is able for mounting on V6,VV6/D64,DD64/V11/S2,SS2/S6/N6. For mounting a potentiometer mounting option (P)
of the respective controller is required!
6 Bit-Type T368 6 Bit-Type T369
PIN connection Colour-code PIN connection Colour-code
1 Not connected – 1 Not connected –
2 Not connected – 2 Not connected –
3 Not connected – 3 Not connected –
4 Not connected – 4 Not connected –
5 Not connected – 5 Not connected –
6 Not connected – 6 Not connected –
7 Not connected – 7 Not connected –
8 Housing 0V blue 8 Housing 0V blue
9 Input 18-30V DC brown 9 Input 18-30V DC brown
10 Not connected – 10 Not connected –
11 Current output green 11 Current output green
12 Direction signal left yellow 12 Direction signal left yellow
13 Direction signal right grey 13 Direction signal right grey
14 Not connected – 14 Not connected –
15 Not connected – 15 Not connected –
– Cable screen white – Cable screen white
6 Bit-type T368 6 Bit-type T369
page 139
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Opto-electronic encoder
OEC 4
with interface Profi bus DP
Opto-elecetronic encoder
Power supply 18-30V DC
Scanning 6, 8 or 9 Bit Gray-Code
Rotation angle Max. +/-150°
Interface Profi bus, DP, address 0-99 adjustable above selector switch
Voltage output 8 Bit Gray-Code T496 linear OEC 4-1-1-2 C27 820g
8 Bit Binary-Code T496 linear OEC 4-2-1-2 C28 820g
6 Bit Gray-Code T496 linear OEC 4-3-1-2 C291 820g
6 Bit Gray-Code T496 quadratic OEC 4-3-2-2 C292 820g
6 Bit Binary-Code T496 linear OEC 4-4-1-2 C301 820g
6 Bit Binary-Code T496 quadratic OEC 4-4-2-2 C302 820g
9 Bit Gray-Code T497 linear one sided right turn OEC 4-5-4-2 C314 820g
9 Bit Gray-Code T497 linear one sided left turn OEC 4-5-5-2 C315 820g
9 Bit Binary-Code T497 linear one sided right turn OEC 4-6-4-2 C324 820g
9 Bit Binary-Code T497 linear one sided left turn OEC 4-6-5-2 C325 820g
Attachment
Plug (Profibus) straight
Plug (Profibus) 90° angled
Plug with cable 2×0,25mm², 2000mm long, cable head open (cable for current supply OEC 4 single application)
Connecting cable OEC 4/ OEC 2 (14×0,25mm²) with 2 plug connectors incl. cable for current supply (2×0,25mm² 2000mm long, cable head
open)
The OEC 4 is able for mounting on V6,VV6/D64,DD64/V11/S2,SS2/S6/N6. For mounting a potentiometer mounting option (P)
of the respective controller is required! For a controller with one axis is required 1 piece of OEC 4, for a controller with 2 axis are required 1
piece of OEC 4 and 1 piece of OEC 2.
zero-point adjustable
page 140
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Electronic control unit ES/43
The electronic control unit ES/43 serves for control of proportional valves without position
control. There is a version for 4 proportional valve solenoids (ES / 43-10) and a version
for 2 Proportional valve solenoids (ES / 43-11) available.
Features:
– Stabailized voltage
– Chopper output stage with adjustable frequency
– Ramp time setting ON/OFF delay
– Creep speed circuit adjustable
– Solenoid current setting separate for minimum current and maximum current
– Output current controlled independently of temperature and solenoid
– Power output short-circuit-proof with overload protection
– Voltage input protected against polarity reversal
– Mechanical selection of direction by means of contacts
– LED operating voltage and working display
– Microprocessor technology therefore especially adaptable
Technical data:
– Supply voltage 10… 32V DC
– Residual ripple 20%
– Control voltage range Ue 0… 5V
– Control current le < 1mA
– Dither frequency f 25… 250Hz
– Proportional valve S 1-4 I min. 0… 1A
Output I max. = I min … 2A at 12 Volt
Output I max. = I min … 1A at 24 Volt
– Ramp time setting t on 0,2… 25sec
t off 0,2… 25sec
– Creep speed variable reduction 25…75%
– Operating temperature -20°C to +60°C
– Storage temperature -40°C to +80°C
Electronic control unit for 4 proportional valves solenoid ES/43-10
Electronic control unit for 2 proportional valves solenoid ES/43-11
page 141
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Example
2
Electronic control unit ES/43
Connections drawing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3
4
2
1
s1
s2
s3
s4
X1
X2
0 V
Creepspeed direction 3-4
Direction of contact SR 4
Direction of contact SR 3
Potentiometer
direction 3-4
Creepspeed direction 1-2
Direction of contact SR 2
Direction of contact SR 1
Potentiometer
direction SR 1-2
Dead man’s contact or
short-circuit-connection
Proportional
valve-solenoid
Supply voltage 10 .. 32 V DC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
2
1
s1
s2
X1
X2
Supply voltage 10 .. 32 V DC
Proportional
valve-solenoid
Dead man’s contact or
short-circuit-connection
Creepspeed direction 1-2
Direction of contact SR 2
Direction of contact SR 1
Potentiometer
direction SR 1-2
0 V
ES / 43-10
4 Proportional valves-solenoid
ES / 43-11
2 Proportional valves-solenoid
3 / 503
page 142
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
*¹ deflection limited to 28°
*² only with adapter installation plate (installation from the top)
Palm grip MATRIX
with attach to our switching device
Controllers
Palm grip
B1 B2 B3 B5 B6
B7
/
B8
B9 B10
B14
/
B15
B20 B22 B23 B24 B25 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32
V6 /
VV6 X X X *􀈻 X X X X X X X X X
V11 X X X X X X X X X X
V8 /
VV8 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
V85 /
VV85 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
V25 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
V24 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
V14 /
S14 X X X X*²
D64 /
DD64 X
D8 X
D3 X
S2 /
SS2 X
S22 /
SS22 X
S21 /
SS21 X X X X X X X X X
S26 X
page 143
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Hall-push button
HD
page 144
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The hall-push button impressed by its durability and versatility. It is available in three
basic versions. By combining different lighting options, colours and symbols, it is possible
to customize.
Technical data
Mechanical life 10 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C til +60°C
Degree of protection IP67
HD1 – 2 – 1 – 1 – 1 – E02 – X
Basic unit
HD1 Hall-push button digital with bellow
HD2 Hall-push button digital without bellow
HD3 Hall-push button digital, flat mounting without bellow
Illumination
1 Unlighted
2 Night light white, U_LED=4,5-5,5V
3 Functional lighting 2-coloured red-green (single shiftable) U_LED=4,5-5,5V
4 Functional lighting 2-coloured red-white (single shiftable) U_LED=4,5-5,5V
5 Functional lighting 2-coloured green-white (single shiftable) U_LED=4,5-5,5V
Actuator colour
1 Transparent
2 Black*
*Only possible by unlighted push button!
Icon platelets
1 White transparent*
2 White
3 Yellow
4 Green
5 Blue
6 Black
7 Red
8 Orange
*Print on back side possible, thereby the print is resistant to abrasion!
Example
2
Hall-push button
HD
page 145
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
HD1 – 2 – 1 – 1 – 1 – E01 – X
Symbol
1 Without
2 Buzzer
3 Arrow up
4 Arrow down
5 Turtle
6 Rabbit
X Custom-made
Interface
E0101 Push button signal not redundant Ub=4,5-5,5V DC
E0111 Push button signal redundant Ub=4,5-5,5V DC
E0201 Push button signal not redundant Ub=4-32V DC
E0211 Push button signal redundant Ub=4-32V DC
0 Energy safe I_Hall max. = 3,2mA (limited)
1 Possible for optocoupler and SPS
2 Power switch (Open Drain) l_Hallmax=25mA
Special model
X Special / customer specified
2
Hall-push button
HD
12,2 9,7
17,7
M12x1
max. 5
Symbol plate
12,5
Hole pattern 8,9 13
16,2
M12x1
Edition:
HD2
17,5 4,4
M12x1
17
15,5
Hole pattern
Edition:
HD1
1 /
Edition:
HD3
page 146
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Palm grip
B1
page 147
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B1 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible cable (4 respectively 8×0,25mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece can be supplied with a tapped hole M10 (standard) or M8.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Contact complement 3A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 1,5A 24V DC13)
B1 – 2D W – X
Basic unit
B1 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button top
D Push button side *􀈻
W Rocker switch top T-0-T
W Rocker switch top R-0-T
W Rocker switch top R-0-R
T Push button top with mechanical operation
(Only possible with multi-axis controller or single-axis controller!)
K Lever switch
KT Lever switch mechanical operation
(Only possible with multi-axis controller or single-axis controller!)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B1
page 148
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Edition:
Lever switch installed side
117
38
1
2
3
Edition:
Push button installed Pos. 1,2,3,4
1 / 284
4
Edition:
Rocker switch installed Pos. 4
Push button installed Pos. 2,3
2
3
4
2
Palm grip
B2
page 149
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B2 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible cable (8×0,25mm², 450mm long).
He can be tilted in any direction by 20 degrees and can lock in this position.
The mounting piece can be supplied with a tapped hole M10 (standard) or M8.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B2 – 2D PA15 – X
Basic unit
B2 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA/70
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
A15 2 push button Pos. 1+2 interlocked
Analog actuating element
PA15 Push button analog Pos. 1+2
2 potentiometer T301 2x5kOhm with direction contacts
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B2
page 150
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Direction of view
65 36
13 68
30°
30°
B2
Edition:
Pusher installed Pos. 1,2
70
3 (4)
Edition:
Push button KDA 21
installed 1,2,3,4
2 1
62
3 (4)
Edition:
Push button KDA / 70
installed Pos. 1,2,3,4
1 / 285
2
Palm grip
B3
page 151
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B3 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm (standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B3 – 2D W K SE PA11 PA13 – X
Basic unit
B3 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, grey
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
K Lever switch
SR Sliding switch
ST Sliding switch
ZD Push button with 2 steps
A12 Push button Pos. 11-12
A11 Thumbwheel T-0-T
A11 Thumbwheel R-0-R
L left, R right
A13 Rotary grip T-0-T
SE Sensor button capacitive
S Sensor button capacitive without external control electronics
(Consistent with V85/VV85 and V25 with interface E4xx+E5xx)
V Vibration
Example
2
Palm grip
B3
page 152
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
B3L – 2D W K SE PA11R PA13 – X
Analog actuating element
PA11 Thumbwheel
Potentiometer T375 2x5kOhm with direction contacts
H11 Thumbwheel
Hall-Potentiometer
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
L left, R right
PA12 Push button analog Pos. 11+12
Potentiometer T375 2x5kOhm with direction contacts
H12 Push button analog Pos. 11+12
Hall-Potentiometer
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
PA13 Rotary handle
Potentiometer T375 2x5kOhm with direction contacts
H13 Hall-Rotary handle
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Z01 Bellow KMD 109 10300009
Z02 Bellow KMD 190 10300093
Z03 Rosette KBF 905 with 4 screws M5x15 necessary for bellow KMD 190 520990004
2
76 Thumbwheel PA11, A11, H11
left or right available ±25°
Twist grip PA13, A13, H13
Direction 13-14
Actuating by rotation ±25°
B3
45
32
70
152
3 4
5 6
Edition:
Push button standard
installed Pos. 1,2
Lever switch
Vibrator button
Sensor button function
on each or both sides
1 2
Edition:
Rocker switch
installed Pos. 7+8
Edition:
Sliding switch
installed Pos. 13 + 14
Drive with potentiometer PA12 bzw.
Push button with 2 steps ZD
installed Pos. 11,12
11 12
13
14
15
9
(10)
Edition:
Push button KDA 21
installed Pos. 1,2,7,8
1 2
7 8
Edition:
Rocker switch
installed Pos. 7 + 8
Push button
installed Pos. 1,2
1 2
3 4
5 6
1 / 287
(16)
() = Installation right
Palm grip
B3
page 153
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Palm grip
B5
page 154
V2016/1 16.02.2016
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B5 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (4 respectively 8×0,25mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece can be supplied with a tapped hole M10 (standard) or M8.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Contact complement 3A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 1,5A 24V DC13)
B5 – 2D W – X
Basic unit
B5 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button top
D Push button side *􀈻
W Rocker switch top T-0-T
W Rocker switch top R-0-T
W Rocker switch top R-0-R
T Push button top mechanical operation
(Only possible in combination with multi-axis controller or single-axis controller!)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B5
page 155
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
91
35
1
2
Edition:
Push button installed Pos. 1,2,3
1 / 290
3
Edition:
Rocker switch installed Pos. 3
Push button installed Pos. 2
2
3
2
Palm grip
B6
page 156
V2016/1 16.02.2016
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B6 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible cable (4 respectively 8×0,25mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece can be supplied with a tapped hole M10 (standard) or M8.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13
B6 – 2D K – X
Basic unit
B6 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button top
W Rocker switch top T-0-T
W Rocker switch top R-0-T
W Rocker switch top R-0-R
K* Lever switch
* Included with the delivery of palm grip B6!
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B6
page 157
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
65
104
39
B6
Edition:
Lever switch side
Rocker switch installed top
Edition:
Lever switch side
Push button top
1 / 291
2
Palm grip
B7 / B8
page 158
V2016/1 16.02.2016
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B7 / B8 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B7 – 2D W K SE S9 PA13 – X
Basic unit
B7 Palm grip left
B8 Palm grip right
Digital actuating element
D Push button
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, white, orange
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
K Lever switch
A13 Rotary grip T-0-T
SE Sensor button capacitive with external control electronics
S Sensor button capacitive without external control electronics
(Consistent with V85/VV85 and V25 with interface E4xx+E5xx)
V Vibrator
Impulse 24V DC ED 100%
Analog actuating element
S12 Hall-thumb rocker (see page 122)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
PA13 Rotary grip
Potentiometer T375 2x5kOhm with direction contacts
H13 Hall-Rotary grip
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Example
2
Palm grip
B7 / B8
page 159
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
B7 – 2D W K SE S9 PA13 – X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Z01 Bellow KMD 109 10300009
Z02 Bellow KMD 190 10300093
Z03 Rosette KBF 905 with 4 screws M5x15 necessary for bellow KMD 190 5209900404
2
Palm grip
B7 / B8
page 160
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
2 3
4
6 5
Vibrator
button
80
142
63
Sensor button
Lever switch
7
8
1
3 2
4
5 6
Twist grip PA13, A13, H13
Direction 13-14
Actuating by rotation ± 25°
B7
Edition:
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 8
B8
Editon:
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 8
Edition:
Multi-axis controller V21
Push button installed Pos. 5,6,7,8
5 6
Edition :
Hall Rocker switch
Push button installed Pos. 1,5,6,8
1
5 6
1 / 293
2
Palm grip
B9
page 161
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B9 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13
B9 – 2D KT A13 PA11 PA13 – X
Basic unit
B9 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white
KT Cross switch T-0-T/T-0-T
KR Cross switch R-0-R/R-0-R
A11 Rocker switch T-0-T Pos. 11+12
A11 Rocker switch R-0-R Pos. 11+12
A13 Rotary grip T-0-T
Analog actuating element
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
PA11 Rocker analog Pos. 11+12
Potentiometer T394 2x5kOhm with direction contacts
H11 Rocker analog Pos. 11+12
Hall-Potentiometer
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
PA13 Rotary grip
Potentiometer T375 2x5kOhm with direction contacts
H13 Hall-Rotary grip
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Z01 Bellow KMD 109 10300009
Z02 Bellow KMD 190 10300093
Z03 Rosette KBF 905 with 4 screws M5x15 necessary for bellow KMD 190 5209900404
Example
2
Palm grip
B9
page 162
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
2
3 4
5
6
8 7
85
80
174
81
Rocker PA11, A11,H11
Direction 11-12
Twist grip PA13,H13
Direction 13-14
Actuating by rotating ± 25°
1
2
3 4
5
6
8 7
B9
Edition :
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 8
Cross switch tast
Edition :
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 8
Multi-axis controller V21
1 / 295
2
Palm grip
B10
page 163
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B10 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our double-handle controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B10AL – 3D W V – X
Basic unit
B10L Palm grip left
B10R Palm grip right
B10AL Palm grip left with growing part
B10AR Palm grip right with growing part
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
W* Rocker switch T-0-T
W* Rocker switch 0-T
W* Rocker switch R-0-T
W* Rocker switch R-0-R
W* Rocker switch 0-R
W* Rocker switch R-R
*Only possible with version with attachment!
V Vibration pulse 24V DC ED 100%
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B10
page 164
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
100
B10A
Edition installed left:
Push button installed Pos. 1,2,3
Rocker switch
1
2
3
65
B10
1 / 297
Vibrator button
37
79,5
10
4
5
6
Edition installed right:
Push button installed Pos. 4,5,6
Rocker switch
2
Palm grip
B14 / B15
page 165
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B14/B15 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis and single-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic
drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 0,1A 24V DC13
B14 – 2D – X
Basic unit
B14 Palm grip left
B15 Palm grip right
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA21 (0,1A 24V DC13)
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B14 / B15
page 166
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
B15
Push button installed Pos. 1,2
1
2
B14
Push button installed Pos. 1,2
1 / 301
1
2
24
31
24
78
144
2
Palm grip
B20
page 167
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B20 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B20L – 2D W K V21 H13 – X
Basic unit
B20L Palm grip left with hand pad
B20R Palm grip right with hand pad
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
HD Hall-push button (see page 144)
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
K Lever switch
KT Cross switch T-0-T/T-0-T
Analog actuating element
S12 Hall-Thumb rocker (see page 122)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
P9 Thumbwheel
Potentiometer
H13 Hall-rotary grip
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Z01 Bellow KMD 109 10300009
Z02 Bellow KMD 190 10300093
Z03 Rosette KBF 905 with 4 screws M5x15 necessary for bellow KMD 190 5209900404
Example
2
Palm grip
B20
page 168
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
101
98
37
Edition:
Push button installed
Cross switch installed
Twist grip H13
70
169
58
84
42
Edition:
Hall rocker switch
Push button
Edition:
Multi-axis controller V21
Potentiometer drive PA9
Push button
Rocker switch tast /
switch A11,H11
Lever switch
1 / 311
2
Palm grip
B22
page 169
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B22 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 7mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B22AL – 4D W – X
Basic unit
B22L Palm grip left
B22R Palm grip right
B22AL Palm grip left with support
B22AR Palm grip right with support
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
W* Rocker switch T-0-T
W* Rocker switch 0-T
W* Rocker switch R-0-T
W* Rocker switch R-0-R
W* Rocker switch 0-R
W* Rocker switch R-R
*Only possible with version with support!
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B22
page 170
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
40
120
B22A
Editon:
Push button installed Pos. 3,4,5,6,7,8
7 8
5 6
3
4
3
4
44
39
8 82
7
B22
Edition:
Push button installed Pos. 1,2,3,4
1 / 315
3
4
3
4
Edition:
Push button installed Pos. 3,4,10
3
4
3
4
1 2 10
54
Edition:
Push button installed Pos. 3,4,5,6,9
Rocker switch installed Pos. 7-8
5 6
7 8
3
4
3
4
9
2
Palm grip
B23
page 171
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B23 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B23R – 2D W V21 – X
Basic unit
B23L Palm grip left
B23R Palm grip right
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
Analog actuating element
S12 Hall-Thumb rocker (see page 122)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B23
page 172
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
36
32
25
115
98 47
1
2
3
4
59 35
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
B23L
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 8 Edition :
Multi-axis controller V21
Push button installed Pos. 5,6,7,8
1 /
B23R
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 8
2
Palm grip
B24
page 173
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B24 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The superior grip surface is framed by an illuminated coloured ring element.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B24 – D 2W V21 – IWH – X
Basic unit
B24 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
SE Sensor button capacitive with external control electronics
S Sensor button capacitive without external control electronics
(Consistent with V85/VV85 and V25 with interface E4xx+E5xx)
Analog actuating element
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
H13 Hall-rotary grip
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Additional option
IWH Colour ring white, illuminated
IRD Colour ring red, illuminated
IBL Colour ring blue, illuminated
WH Colour ring white
RD Colour ring red
BL Colour ring blue
GN Colour ring green
YE Colour ring yellow
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B24
page 174
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
18,50 141
43
ca. 41
1 2
3 4
7 (8)
9
Edition :
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 6, 10
Rocker switch / taste installed Pos. 7,(8), 9
() left
Twist grip H13
Direction 13-14
Actuating by rotation ± 25°
39 25
6 5
9
7 (8)
10
11
Edition :
Push button installed Pos. 5,6,10
Rocker switch / taste Pos. 7,(8), 9
multi-axis controller V21 Pos. 11
() left
1 /
2
Palm grip
B25
page 175
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B25 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC 13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B25L – 2D W K SE V21 H13 – X
Basic unit
B25L Palm grip left
B25R Palm grip right
Digitale actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
HD Hall-push button (see page 144)
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
K Lever switch
SR Sliding switch R-O-R
ST Slide switch T-0-T
SE Sensor button capacitive with external control electronics
S Sensor button capacitive without external control electronics
(Consistent with V85/VV85 and V25 with interface E4xx+E5xx)
V Vibration
Analog actuating element
S12 Hall-Thumb rocker (see page 122)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
H13 Hall-rotary grip
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Attachments
Z01 Bellow KMD 109 10300009
Z02 Bellow KMD 190 10300093
Z03 Rosette KBF 905 with 4 screws M5x15 necessary for bellow KMD 190 5209900404
Example
2
Palm grip
B25
page 176
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
1
3
5
2
4
6
B25L
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 11
Lever switch installed Pos. 12
49
29
51
1
2
3
4
5
6
B25R
Push button installed Pos. 1 – 11
Lever switch installed Pos. 12
Twist grip PA13,H13
Direction 13-14
Actuating by
rotation ± 25°
72 37
146
7
11
8
9
10
12
Rocker switch
installed Pos. 9+10 possible
Lever switch
Edition: B25R
installed Pos. 2+4
Multi-axis controller V21
installed Pos. 5+6
Rocker switch
Edition: B25R
installed Pos. 3+1
Sliding switch
installed Pos. 2+4
Rocker switch
8
10
12
11
7
9
Edition: B25R
installed Pos. 3+1
Rocker switch
installed Pos. 2+4
Rocker switch
1 /
2
Palm grip
B28
page 177
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B28 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis and single-axis controller or mounted on
hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 10mm
(standard).
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
B28 – 2D SE – X
Basic unit
B28 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button (1,5A 24V DC13)
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, grey
SE Sensor button capacitive with external control electronics
S Sensor button capacitive without external control electronics
(Consistent with V85/VV85 and V25 with interface E4xx+E5xx)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B28
page 178
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
70
18 102
1
6
3
4
43,6
7
8
2
5
Edition:
Push button installed
Pos. 2,5,7,8
Sensor button function on left or right available
7
8
9
10
Edition:
Push button installed
Pos. 1,3,4,6,7,8
Sensor button function on left or right available
Edition:
Push button installed
Pos. 7,8,9,10
Sensor button function on left or right available
1 /
2
Palm grip
B29
page 179
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B29 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis and single-axis controller or mounted on
hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 0,1A 24V DC13
B29 – 2D – X
Basic unit
B29 Palm grip
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA21
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
SE Sensor button capacitive with external control electronics
S Sensor button capacitive without external control electronics
(Consistent with V85/VV85 and V25 with interface E4xx+E5xx)
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B29
page 180
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
95
82
25°
27,1
B29
3 4
43
104,5
Edition:
Sensor installed Pos. 6,
Push button installed Pos. 3,4
Edition:
Push button installed Pos. 1-6
100,5
1 2 3 4
6 5
6
104,5
Edition:
Sensor installed Pos. 5,
Push button installed Pos. 1,2
1 2
5
1 /
2
Palm grip
B30
page 181
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B30 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC 13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B30 – 2D W SR SE S12 H13 – X
Basic unit
B30 Palm grip
Digitale actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
HD Hall-push button (see page 144)
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
SR Sliding switch R-O-R
ST Slide switch T-0-T
SE Sensor button capacitive with external control electronics
S Sensor button capacitive without external control electronics
(Consistent with V85/VV85 and V25 with interface E4xx+E5xx)
Analog actuating element
S12 Hall-Thumb rocker (see page 122)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
H13 Hall-rotary grip
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B30
Edition:
installed Pos. 2+4
Multi-axis controller V21
installed Pos. 5+6
Rocker switch
Edition:
installed Pos. 3+1
Sliding switch
installed Pos. 2+4
Rocker switch
Edition:
installed Pos. 3+1
Rocker switch
installed Pos. 2+4
Rocker switch
18,50
ca. 41
1
3
5
2
4
6
Twist grip H13
Direction 13-14
Acutating by
rotation ±25°
137
56 20
7
9
11
8
11
10
1 /
B30
Push button
installed Pos. 1 – 8 +11
Rocker switch
installed Pos. 9+10
page 182
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
2
Palm grip
B31
page 183
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B31 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B31R – 2D W KT S12 V21 – X
Basic unit
B21R Palm grip right
Digital actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
HD Hall-push button (see page 144)
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
KT Cross switch T-0-T/T-0-T
Analog actuating element
S12 Hall-Thumb rocker (see page 122)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
CAN
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Idle current consumption 80mA (24VDC)
Current carrying capacity External digital output for LEDs 5mA – 30mA (dependent on the number of LEDs)
Protocol CANOpen CiA DS 301 or SAE J1939
Baud rate 20kBit/s to 1Mbit/s (standard 250kBit/s)
Output value 255…0…255
CAN E311 1
– 4 analog joystick axis
– 24 digital joystick functions
Additional with 16 LED-outputs 2
2
Palm grip
B31
page 184
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
114 60
159
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12 11
13
78
14
Edition:
Multi-axis controller V21
installed Pos. 6+7, Pos.8, Pos. 9+10
Rocker switch installed Pos. 1+2
Edition:
Rocker switch
installed Pos. 15, 16 horizontal
15
16
15
16
11+12
Edition:
Rocker switch
installed Pos.11+12, 15, 16 vertical
Edition:
Multi-axis controller V21
Installed Pos. 6+7, Pos.8, Pos. 9+10
Push button installed Pos. 1-5
1 /
B31
Edition:
Push button installed Pos. 1-14
2
Palm grip
B32
page 185
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The palm grip B32 has different equipment options for many requirements.
It is compatible with our multi-axis controller or mounted on hydraulic drives.
The palm grip has a highly flexible single wire (0,1mm², 450mm long).
The mounting piece for the drive rod can be supplied with a tapped hole 12mm
(standard) or 10mm.
Technical data
Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Contact complement 1,5A 24V DC 13 (*􀈻 0,1A 24V DC13)
B32L – 2D W SE S12 – X
Basic unit
B32L Palm grip left
B32R Palm grip right
Digitale actuating element
D Push button KDA21 *􀈻
Colour: red, black, yellow, green, blue, white, orange
HD Hall-push button (see page 144)
W Rocker switch T-0-T
W Rocker switch 0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-T
W Rocker switch R-0-R
W Rocker switch 0-R
W Rocker switch R-R
SE Sensor button capacitive with external control electronics
S Sensor button capacitive without external control electronics
(Consistent with V85/VV85 and V25 with interface E4xx+E5xx)
Analog actuating element
S12 Hall-Thumb rocker (see page 122)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
V21 Hall-minijoystick (see page 61)
Output 0,5…2,5…4,5V inverse dual
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
2
Palm grip
B32
page 186
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Edition:
Rocker switch
installed Pos.1/3 + 2/4
(Pos. 9 – 11 not available)
Edition:
Rocker switch
installed Pos. 5/6
Edition:
Multi-axis controller V21
installed Pos. 1/3
(Pos. 9 – 11 not available)
Rocker switch crosswise
installed Pos. 10
Push button
installed Pos. 1 – 8, 12 + 13
Rocker switch lengthwise
installed Pos. 10
76
26
14
64
1
3
5
2
4
6
9 11
ca 41
24
8
7
12
13
10
1 /
B32
Push button
installed Pos. 1 – 8, 11 – 13
Rocker switch
installed Pos.9
2
page 187
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Housing for our switching device
Dimension outside
in mm
(BxLxH)
Dimension inside
in mm
(BxLxH)
Remarks Weight
KG Form
Steel sheet housing material thickness 1/1,5mm
Protection IP54 painting RAL 7032 pebble-grey textured varnish
200 x 200 x 92 166 x 166 x 90 1,3 B 200
230x 230 x 105 196 x 196 x 102 1,4 B 230
230 x 340 x 105 196 x 306 x 102 1,5 B 230 x 340
230 x 440 x 105 196 x 406 x 102 1,6 B 230 x 440
250 x 250 x 150 216 x 216 x 147 1,6 B 250 x 250
150 x 400 x 105 116 x 366 x 102 3,2 B 150 x 400
150 x 500 x 105 116 x 466 x 102 3,5 B 150 x 500
150 x 600 x 105 116 x 566 x 102 3,8 B 150 x 600
260 x 500 x 105 226 x 466 x 102 3,8 B 260 x 500
260 x 600 x 105 226 x 566 x 102 4,2 B 260 x 600
dimensions special On enquiry
Plastic housing polycarbonat
Protection IP65 colour RAL 7035 fair-grey
120 x 122 x 105 113 x 115 x 98 0,35 l 120 x 122
120 x 160 x 140 113 x 134 x 133 0,6 l 120 x 160
160 x 240 x 120 153 x 215 x 114 0,8 l 160 x 240
160 x 360 x 100 153 x 352 x 94 1,0 l 160 x 360
230 x 300 x 110 223 x 293 x 103 1,15 l 230 x 300
Plastic housing polyester
Protection IP65 colour RAL 7000 grey
220 x 335 x 115 200 x 292 x 108 Colour altern. RAL 9011 black 1,65 l 220 x 335
220 x 465 x 115 200 x 432 x 108 Colour altern. RAL 9011 black 2,24 l 220 x 465
250 x 255 x 120 236 x 243 x 110 2,65 l 250 x 255
250 x 400 x 120 236 x 386 x 110 3,65 l 250 x 400
250 x 600 x 120 236 x 586 x 110 5,24 l 250 x 600
Accessory parts
Hinges each housing (2 pcs.) 0,2
Armrest with clamp adjustable straps 0,5
Cable entry M20 cable 7-13mm With anti-kink predection and strain relief 0,15
Cable entry M32 cable 11-21mm With anti-kink predection and strain relief 0,2
Cable entry M40 cable 19-28mm With anti-kink predection and strain relief 0,25
Pillar with flange 100 x 100 x 535mm high Flange 150 x 150mm 14,0
Indicating labels not engraved
Indicating labes with engraving Character
2
page 188
V2017/1 03.04.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Attachment for crane control unit,
portable control unit and housing
Command and indicating devices 22mm (Siemens Typ 3SU) incl. indicating label Contactcomplement
Weight
KG Type
Push button 1 S + 1 Ö 0,040 D
Selector switch 0-1 2 positions 1 S + 1 Ö 0,050 W
Selector switch 1-0-2 3 positions 2 S + 2 Ö 0,060 W
Key switch 0-1 2 positions 1 S + 1 Ö 0,130 S
Key switch 1-0-2 3 positions 2 S + 2 Ö 0,140 S
Mushroom key switch latching 1 S + 1 Ö 0,080 PS
Mushroom head push button latching 1 Ö 0,060 PV
Illuminated push button diode 24V DC/AC 1 S + 1 Ö 0,040 LD
Illuminated push button diode 230V AC 1 S + 1 Ö 0,040 LD
Indicator light diode 24V DC/AC 0,040 L
Indicator light diode 230V AC 0,040 L
Coordinate switch 2 positions horizontal T-O-T 3SU1030-7AC10 2 S 0,102 K
Coordinate switch 2 positions vertical T-O-T 3SU1030-7AD10 2 S 0,102 K
Coordinate switch 4 positions T-O-T / T-O-T 3SU1030-7AF10 4 S 0,112 K
Switching element in addition 1S + 1Ö 0,010
Other command and indicating devices
Summer 0,250
Knee button FAK-S/KC/l 1 S + 1 Ö 0,350
Foot button 1 S + 1 Ö 0,450
Attachments
Drilling 22mm
Blind plug 22mm
Cutouts for display devices
Microphone with gooseneck
Power supply 230V/24V DC for driver seat
page 189
3
Crane control unit
KST 4 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 4 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort.
Equipment boxes:
The sheet steel equipment boxes are vertically and horizontally
adjustable. The arrangement of the joysticks, indicators and control
devices is customised according to customer specifications.
Cabling is carried out through a cross-member in the traverse.
(Terminal block)
Special boxes available upon request.
Driver seat:
As standard the KST 4 is fitted with a KFS 11 seat. The seat itself is
fitted with a hydraulic vibration absorption system complete with weight
adjustment to ensure that the comfort level is fitted with armrests and
a headrest. There is the option to have the seat covered with
air-permeable artificial leather.
Cross-member with swivel base:
The cover of the sheet steel cross-member including the driver’s seat is
forward foldable.
Thereby all wirings, terminals and bushings are easily accessible during
commissioning and maintenance.
Swivel base has zero-clearance bearing and can be locked by a friction
brake.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 9011 black
KST 41 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 41 With equipment boxes 160x420mm
KST 42 With equipment boxes 200x420mm
Base unit
1 Swiveling 180° left, 90° right with friction brake
2 Electric swiveling 180° left, 90° right
3 Non swiveling
4 Without base frame
Attachments
M1 Monitor mounting with monitor housing
M2 Monitor mounting with monitor mounting bracket
M3 Monitor mounting without monitor housing/-mounting bracket
F1 Footrest mounted dispatch 1 KBF/433
H Heater 2x2kW with ventilator
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment of crane control units +/- 250mm
Driver seat
KFS 11* (Included in the delivery!)
KFS 9*
KFS 10*
KFS 12*
*Description see driver seat page 221
Example
page 190
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 4 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KST 41 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Wiring
KL Without wiring, each terminal block built in each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5mm² 5m long, each terminal
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X􀈻 Special painted
Option
Radio remote control system
page 191
3
Crane control unit
KST 4 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
510 ±30 *
1140 ±30 *
A 580 A
B
220
590
84
550
weight loaded
KFS 11
optional
KFS 12
640 ±25 *
40° 480 ±25 *
swing-up
equipment
boxes
55°
10° 5°
370 ±125 *
Horizontal adjustment
seat with equipment boxes
100 100
Horizontal adjustment
of equipment boxes
25 25
Inclination
adjustment
of equipment
boxes
420
C
90°
180°
2
1
3 4
6
5
7 8
Direction of view
left
box
right
seat box
14
300
240
Floor mounting
cable inlet Ø100
848
with heating
2 / 041
* adjustable
Type Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C
KST 41 160 900 max. 670
min. 570
KST 42 200 980 max. 700
min. 600
page 192
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 5 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 5 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort.
Equipment boxes:
The equipment boxes are made from sheet steel and as standard have
a hinged lid with locking feature. This allows for easy inspection and
maintenance. The side of the equipment boxes is as standard fitted
with an inspection plate which again is lockable. The arrangement of
the joystick, indicators and control devices is cutomised according to
customer specifications. This combined with the custom sized and profiled
equipment boxes that are available means that the KST 5 is very
flexible and customisable solution.
Driver seat:
As standard the KST 5 is fitted with a KFS 11 seat. The seat itself is
fitted with a hydraulic vibration absorption system complete with weight
adjustment to ensure that the comfort level is fitted with armrests and
a headrest. There is the option to have the seat covered with
air-permeable artificial leather.
Cross-member with swivel base:
The cover of the sheet steel cross-member including the driver’s seat is
forward foldable.
Thereby all wirings, terminals and bushings are easily accessible during
commissioning and maintenance.
Swivel base has zero-clearance bearing and can be locked by a friction
brake.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 7032 pebble-grey
KST 51 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 51 With equipment boxes 200x580mm
KST 52 With equipment boxes 270x580mm
KST 54 With equipment boxes 320x580mm
Special boxes for request!
Base unit
1 Swiveling 180° left, 90° right with friction brake
2 Electric swiveling 180° left, 90° right
3 Non swiveling
Attachments
M1 Monitor mounting with monitor housing
M2 Monitor mounting with monitor mounting bracket
M3 Monitor mounting without Monitor housing/-mounting bracket
F1 Footrest KBF/433
H Heater 2x2kW with ventilator 240V AC
LS Plate for horizontal manual adjustment for control units +/- 75mm
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment for control units +/- 250mm
Label without engraving for multi-axis-/ single-axis controller
Label with engraving for multi-axis-/ single-axis controller
Example
page 193
3
Crane control unit
KST 5 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KST 51 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Driver seat
KFS 11* (Included in the delivery!)
KFS 9*
KFS 10*
KFS 12*
*Description see driver seat page 221
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Wiring
KL Without, but terminal block built each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5mm² 5m long, each terminal
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X1 Special painted
Option
Radio remote control system
page 194
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 5 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
360
84
544
1140 ±30*
510 ±30*
600
990
A A
B
600
weight loaded
KFS 11
optional
KFS 12
90
25
580
418
1200 ( traverse path 500 )
40° Horizontal
adjustment
of control unit
250 250
Manual
adjustment
of foot rest
15
15
Horizontal
adjustment
of seat
100 100
C
90°
180°
2
1
3 4
6
5
7 8
Direction of view
left
box
right
box
seat
14
300
240
Floor mounting
cable inlet Ø100
600
550
130
1200
630
1150
14
Floor mounting
2/051
2014
* adjustable
Type Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C
KST 51 200 1000 580
KST 52 270 1140 640
KST 54 320 1240 690
page 195
3
Crane control unit
KST 6 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 6 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort.
Equipment boxes:
The sheet steel equipment boxes are vertically and horizontally
adjustable. The arrangement of the joysticks, indicators and control
devices is customised according to customer specifications.
Cabling is carried out through a cross-member in the traverse.
(Terminal block)
Driver seat:
As standard the KST 6 is fitted with a KFS 11 seat. The seat itself is
fitted with a hydraulic vibration absorption system complete with weight
adjustment to ensure that the comfort level is fitted with armrests and
a headrest. There is the option to have the seat covered with
air-permeable artificial leather.
Cross-member with swivel base:
The cover of the sheet steel cross-member including the driver’s seat is
forward foldable.
Thereby all wirings, terminals and bushings are easily accessible during
commissioning and maintenance.
Swivel base has zero-clearance bearing and can be locked by a friction
brake.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 9011 black
KST 6 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 6 With equipment boxes
Base unit
1 Swiveling 180° left, 90° right with friction brake
2 Electric swiveling 180° left, 90° right
3 Non swiveling
4 Without base frame
Attachments
M1 Monitor mounting with monitor housing
M2 Monitor mounting with monitor mounting bracket
M3 Monitor mounting without monitor housing/-mounting bracket
F1 Footrest KBF/433
H Heater 2x2kW with ventilator
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment for control units +/- 250mm
Driver seat
KFS 11* (Included in the delivery!)
KFS 9*
KFS 10*
KFS 12*
*Description see driver seat page 221
Example
page 196
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 6 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KST 6 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Wiring
KL Without, but terminal block built each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5mm² 5m long each terminal
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X􀈻 Special painted
Option
Radio remote control system
page 197
3
Crane control unit
KST 6 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
72
510 ±30 *
1140 ±30 *
130 540 130
800
weight loaded
KFS 11
optional
KFS 12
585 ±40 *
40°
15°
300 ±140 *
460 ±40 *
Horizontal adjustment
seat with equipment boxes
100 100
Horizontal adjustment
of equipment boxes
40 40
Inclination
adjustment
of equipment
boxes
max. 600
min. 500
90°
180°
2
1
3 4
6
5
7 8
Direction of view
left
box
right
seat box
14
300
240
Floor mounting
cable inlet Ø100
* adjustable
848
with heating
2 / 061
page 198
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 7
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 7 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort.
Equipment boxes:
The equipment boxes are made from sheet steel and as standard have
a hinged lid with locking feature. This allows for easy inspection and
maintenance. The side of the equipment boxes is as standard fitted
with an inspection plate which again is lockable. The arrangement of
the joystick, indicators and control devices is customised according to
customer specifications. This combined with the custom sized and profiled
equipment boxes that are available means that the KST 7 is very
flexible and customisable solution.
Driver seat:
The tipped spring mounted seat KFS 4 is fit with an hydraulic
vibration absorption system incl. weight adjustment. With the folding
spring mounted seat you can also arrive your workplace in small cabins.
Base plate:
The cran control unit is available with or without base plate.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 7032 pebble-grey
KST 7 – 1 / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 7 With equipment boxes 290x500mm
KST 75 With equipment boxes 210x500mm
Special boxes for request!
Base plate
1 With base plate prepare for driver seat KFS 4
2 With base plate prepare for driver seat KFS 2
3 With base plate with apron for driver seat KFS 9, KFS 11…
4 Without base plate
Driver seat
KFS 4* (Included in the delivery!)
KFS 2*
KFS 11*
KFS 9*
*Description see driver seat page 215
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Example
page 199
3
Crane control unit
KST 7
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KST 7 – 1 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Wiring
KL Without wiring, but terminal block built each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5mm² 5m long each terminal
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X􀈻 Special painted
Option
Radio remote control system
page 200
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 7
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
290
320
45
30
20
300
25
245
9
30
570
650…740
750
C
290 A 290
B
780…990
X
KFS 2
Direction of view
250 250
62 375 375
1180
180
220
340
18
Base plate
for KFS 4, 9
Cutting
250 250
62 300 300
1030
180
220
340
18
Base plate
for KFS 2
Cutting
80
340
500
320
260…430
610…780
View X
Cutting
200×260
2/071
2014
Without
base plate
Type Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C
KFS 2 450 1030 50
KFS 4 600 1180 25
KFS 9 600 1180 25
page 201
3
Crane control unit
KST 8 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 8 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort.
Equipment boxes:
The sheet steel equipment boxes are vertically and horizontally
adjustable. The arrangement of the joysticks, indicators and control
devices is customised according to customer specifications.
Cabling is carried out through a cross-member in the traverse.
(Terminal block)
Special boxes available upon request.
Driver seat:
As standard the KST 8 is fitted with a KFS 11 seat. The seat itself is
fitted with a hydraulic vibration absorption system complete with weight
adjustment to ensure that the comfort level is fitted with armrests and
a headrest. There is the option to have the seat covered with
air-permeable artificial leather.
Cross member with swivel base:
The cover of the sheet steel cross-member including the driver’s seat is
forward foldable.
Thereby all wirings, terminals and bushings are easily accessible during
commissioning and maintenance.
Swivel base has zero-clearance bearing and can be locked by a friction
brake.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 9011 black
KST 8 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 8 With equipment boxes
Base unit
1 Swiveling 180° left, 90° right with friction brake
2 Electric swiveling 180° left, 90° right
3 Non swiveling
4 Without base frame
Attachments
M1 Monitor mounting with monitor housing
M2 Monitor mounting with monitor mounting bracket
M3 Monitor mounting without monitor housing/-mounting bracket
F1 Footrest KBF/433
H Heater 2x2kW with ventilator
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment of control units +/- 250mm
Driver seat
KFS 11* (Included in the delivery!)
KFS 9*
KFS 10*
KFS 12*
*Description see driver seat page 221
Example
page 202
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 8 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KST 8 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Wiring
KL Without wiring, but terminal block built each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5mm² 5m long each terminal
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X􀈻 Special painted
Option
Radio remote control system
page 203
3
Crane control unit
KST 8 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
72
510 ±30 *
1140 ±30 *
130 580 130
840
weight loaded
KFS 11
optional
KFS 12
800 ±25 *
40° 470 ±25 *
swing-up
equipment
boxes
55°
10° 5°
531 ±125 *
Horizontal adjustment
seat with equipment boxes
100 100
Horizontal adjustment
of equipment boxes
25 25
Inclination
adjustment
of equipment
boxes
max.780
min.660
90°
180°
2
1
3 4
6
5
7 8
Direction of view
left
box
right
box
seat
14
300
240
Floor mounting
cable inlet Ø100
* adjustable
848
with heating
2 / 081
2014
page 204
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 85
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 85 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort.
Equipment boxes:
The sheet steel equipment boxes are vertically and horizontally
adjustable. The arrangement of the joysticks, indicators and control
devices is customised according to customer specifications.
Cabling is carried out through a cross-member in the traverse.
(Terminal block)
Special boxes available upon request.
Driver seat:
The comfortable spring mounted seat KFS 85 with roller-bearing swivel
systems.
Heating console:
Cover with 2 steps heating (2x2kW 400V AC) with integrated
ventilator. The cover of the heating cover can be tilted forward to reach
the terminal block of the heating and cable execution.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 9011 black
KST 85 – M1 / KFS 82 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 85 With heating in the apron
KST 87 With apron without heating
Attachments
M1 Monitor mounting with monitor housing
M2 Monitor mounting with monitor mounting bracket
M3 Monitor mounting without monitor housing/-mounting bracket
Driver seat
KFS 82* (Included in the delivery!)
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
…. More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Wiring
KL Without wiring, but with terminal block built each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5mm 5m long each terminal
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X􀈻 Special painted
Option
Radio remote control system
Example
page 205
3
Crane control unit
KST 85
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
130 560 130
820
595 ±30 *
1100 ±30 *
weight loaded
KFS 8
850 ±25 *
10°
5°
470 ±25 *
7,5° 20,5°
7×4° = 28°
306 ±75 *
Horizontal adjustment
of equipment boxes
25 25
Horizontal adjustment
seat with equipment boxes
75 75
Inclination
adjustment
of equipment
boxes
90°
2
1
4 3
6
5
8 7
Direction of view
left
box
right
seat box
Swivelled one-sided
endpoints to lock
100
320
86
266,5 168,5
80
197 53
Floor mounting
* adjustable
Ø12×20
cable inlet Ø28
Middlepoint
seat
Fresh air
opening
2 / 083
page 206
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 10 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 10 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort.
Equipment boxes:
The sheet steel equipment boxes are vertically and horizontally
adjustable. The arrangement of the joysticks, indicators and control
devices is customised according to customer specifications.
Cabling is carried out through a cross-member in the traverse.
(Terminal block)
Special boxes available upon request.
Driver seat:
As standard the KST 10 is fitted with a KFS 11 seat. The seat itself is
fitted with a hydraulic vibration absorption system complete with weight
adjustment to ensure that the comfort level is fitted with armrests and
a headrest. There is the option to have the seat covered with
air-permeable artificial leather.
Cross-member with swivel base:
The cover of the sheet steel cross-member including the driver’s seat is
forward foldable.
Thereby all wirings, terminals and bushings are easily accessible during
commissioning and maintenance.
Swivel base has zero-clearance bearing and can be locked by a friction
brake.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 9011 black
KST 10 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V85 / V85.1 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 10 With equipment boxes
Base unit
1 Swiveling 180° left, 90° right with friction brake
2 Electric swiveling 180° left, 90° right
3 Non swiveling
4 Without base frame
Attachments
M1 Monitor mounting with monitor housing
M2 Monitor mounting with monitor mounting bracket
M3 Monitor mounting without monitor housing/-mounting bracket
F1 Footrest KBF/433
H Heater 2x2kW with ventilator
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment of control units +/- 250mm
Driver seat
KFS 11* (Included in the delivery!)
KFS 9*
KFS 10*
KFS 12*
*Description see driver seat page 221
Example
page 207
3
Crane control unit
KST 10 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KST 10 – 3 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 11 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Wiring
KL Without wiring, but terminal block built in each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5mm² 5m long each terminal
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X􀈻 Special painted
Option
Radio remote control system
page 208
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 10 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
max. 720
min. 520
90°
180°
2
1
3 4
6
5
7 8
Direction of view
left
box
right
box
seat
14
300
240
Floor mounting
cable inlet Ø100
* adjustable
473 ±25 *
440 ±125 *
707 ±25 *
40°
swing-up
equipment
boxes
55°
10° 5°
Inclination
adjustment
of equipment
boxes
Horizontal adjustment
seat with equipment boxes
100 100
Horizontal adjustment
of equipment boxes
25 25
848
with heating
72
510 ±30 *
1140 ±30 *
130 510 130
770
KFS 11
optional
KFS 12
2 / 101
weight loaded
page 209
3
Crane control unit
KST 19 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 19 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort.
Equipment boxes:
The equipment boxes are vertically and horizontally
adjustable. The arrangement of the joysticks, indicators and control
devices is customised according to customer specifications.
Cabling is carried out through a cross-member in the traverse.
(Terminal block)
Driver seat:
As standard the KST 19 is fitted with a KFS 10 seat. The seat itself
is fitted with a pneumatic vibration absorption system complete with
weight adjustment to ensure that the comfort level is fitted with armrests
and a headrest. There is the option to have the seat covered with
air-permeable artificial leather.
Cross-member with swivel base:
The cover of the sheet steel cross-member including the driver’s seat is
forward foldable.
Thereby all wirings, terminals and bushings are easily accessible during
commissioning and maintenance.
Swivel base has zero-clearance bearing and can be locked by a friction
brake.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 7035 light grey
KST 19 – 1 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS 10 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 19 With equipment boxes
Base unit
1 Swiveling 180° left, 90° right with friction brake
2 Non swiveling
Attachments
M1 Monitor mounting with monitor housing
M2 Monitor mounting with monitor mounting bracket
M3 Monitor mounting without monitor housing/ -mounting bracket
M4 Monitor mounting (Monitor < 5kg) with monitor housing
M5 Monitor mounting (Monitor < 5kg) with mounting adapter
F1 Footrest version 1 KBF/433
H Heater 2x2kW with ventilator
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment for control units +/- 250mm
Driver seat
KFS 10* (Included in the delivery!)
*Description see driver seat page 223
Example
page 210
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 19 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KST19 – 1 – M1 – F1 – LK / KFS10 / V64 / V64.1 / KL / X
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Wiring
KL Without wiring, but terminal block built in each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5mm² 5m long each terminal
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X􀈻 Special painted
Option
Radio remote control system
page 211
3
Crane control unit
KST 19 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
539 ±20 *
Equipment box
in centre
adjustable
±22
Equipment box
in centre
adjustable
±22
KFS 10
Vertical weight adjustment
seat incl. equipment boxes
(weight loaded)
Monitor mounting
support rotable
about monitor
<5kg
left or right
Monitor mounting
support rotable
about monitor
>5kg
left or right
205
-50 *
170
284 ±80 *
658
+338
-288 *
7,5°
90° stepless Horizontal
adjustment seat
200 40
Horizontal adjustment
seat with equipment boxes
125 125
Horizontal adjustment
of equipment boxes
90 176
Vertical adjustment
equipment boxes to seat
12°
12°
Inclination
adjustement
of equipment
boxes
Backrest
adjustable
max. 1050
45°
45°
90° 180°
min.590
max.1100
Direction of view
left box
45° to the middle
rotable
right box
45° to the middle
rotable
±170
seatcushion
depth adjustment
monitor mounting
support rotable
monitor mounting
support rotable
240
300
14
Floor mounting
cable inlet Ø100
2/111
2014
* adjustable
page 212
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 30 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The KST 30 is an ergonomically designed swiveling crane control chair
which provides a high degree of comfort. The inner consoles, mounted
to the driver’s seat, swing with the seat. The consoles can be positioned
to perfectly match any person by means of length, height and inclination
adjustment. For console version 1 the whole control unit can be
expanded by additional fixed outer consoles.
The standard version includes:
Inner consoles:
The plastic consoles can be height-adjusted to match joysticks of any
size. In addition consoles can be equipped with custom command and
indicating devices.
Outer consoles:
The outer metal consoles feature foldable top covers, including mechanical
fixation to keep cover in open position.
Internal terminal strips can easily be accessed be removeable side
covers. Command and indicating devices can be added based on
customer’s choice. Also special sizes and shapes of outer consoles are
available on request.
Driver’s seat:
The comfortable driver’s seat KFS11 is equipped with a spring loaded
hydraulic vibration absorption system, including weight adjustment,
air-permeable textile cover, arm rests and head rest.
Cross-member with swivel base:
The cover of the sheet steel cross-member including the driver’s seat is
forward foldable. Thereby all wirings, terminals and bushings are easily
accessible during commissioning and maintenance.
Swivel base has zero-tolerance bearings and rotation can be locked in
3° steps.
Surface treatment:
Base coat and textured varnish
Standard colour RAL 7035 light grey in combination with RAL 7016
anthracite
KST 311 -3 -M1 -F1 -LK / KFS 11 / V85 / V85 / KL / X
Basic unit
KST 301 With inner equipment boxes version 1
KST 311 With inner eqiupment boxes version 1
and outside eqiupment boxes 160mm wide
KST 331 With inner eqiupment boxes version 1
and outside eqiupment boxes 270mm wide
KST 341 With inner eqiupment boxes version 1
and outside eqiupment boxes 320mm wide
Special equipment boxes form on request!
Base unit
2 Swiveling 180° left, 90° right with detent
3 Electric swiveling 180° left, 90° right
4 Non swiveling
Attachments
M1 Monitor mounting with monitor housing
M2 Monitor mounting with monitor mounting bracket
M3 Monitor mounting without monitor housing/ -mounting bracket
F1 Footrest version 1
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment for control units +/- 250mm
Driver seat
KFS 11* (Included in the delivery!)
KFS 9*
KFS 10*
KFS 12*
*Description see driver seat page 221
page 213
3
Crane control unit
KST 30 swiveling
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KST 311 -3 -M1 -F1 -LK / KFS 11 / V85 / V85 / KL / X
Mounting for equipment boxes
V… Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S… Single-axis controller (see page 86)
D… Double-handle controller (see page 63)
N… Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Wiring
KL Without wiring, but terminal block built in each terminal
KLV On terminal block 4mm² with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLV On SPS (SPS provision) with single wire 1mm² each terminal
KLVA External wiring single wire highly flexible 1,5 mm² 5m long each terminal
Additional-/ reduction price per meter
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X Special painted
page 214
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Crane control unit
KST 30 swiveling
790 (KST311-341)
A 790 A
B
550 (KST301)
290 ±30* 630
1096 ±30*
176
84
470 ±30*
734
weight loaded
KFS 11
optional
KFS 12
40°
Inclination
adjustment
of equipment
boxes
10°
10°
Vertical
adjustment
equipment
boxes
30
30
Vertical
adjustment
seat
30
30
Manual
adjustment
of foot rest
15
15
Horizontal
adjustment seat
100 100
Horizontal adjustment
of equipment boxes
40 40
90°
180°
C
2
1
4 3
6
5
8 7
Direction of view
left equipment
box 7,5° rotable
right equipment
box 7,5° rotable
Sitz
KST 301
14
300
240
Floor mounting
cable inlet Ø100
C
180°
90°
2
1
3 4
6
5
7 8
KST 311-341
right
box
left
box
Equipment boxes NOT rotable
seat
2/
2017
* adjustable
Type Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C
KST 301 – – 500
KST 311 160 1110 610
KST 331 270 1330 710
KST 341 320 1430 755
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
page 215
3
Driver seat
KFS 2
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The crane driver`s seat KFS 2 has stepless high adjustment by means of a gas-loaded
spring. The backrest can be tilted, forwards onto the cushion, which in turn can then be
tilted 90° sideways. All these functions are performed easily via levers.
Technical data
Horizontal adjustment 100mm
Inclination of the backrest max. 10°
Height adjustment 120mm
KFS 22
Driver seat
KFS 21 With air-permeable artificial leather cover black
KFS 22 With textile cover grey / black
Example
page 216
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Driver seat
KFS 2
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
54
275 200
120 400…470
160…260
420…540
750…960
320…390
120
160
14
Floor mounting
2/130
2014
page 217
3
Driver seat
KFS 4
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The crane driver`s seat KFS 4 has stepless high adjustment by means of a gas-loaded
spring and an oil-hydraulic vibration absorption system with weight adjustment.
The backrest can be tilted, forwards into the cushion, which in turn can then be tilted 90°
sideways.
All functions are performed by a simple lever operation.
The metal parts are protected against corrosion and painted black.
Technical data:
Suspension stoke 80mm
Weight adjustment 50 – 130kg
Horizontal adjustment 100mm
Inclination of the backrest max. 20°
Height adjustment 100mm
KFS 42 – A1
Driver seat
KFS 41 Driver seat with air-permeable artificial leather cover black
KFS 42 Driver seat with textile cover grey / black
Attachments
A1 Armrest fully adjustable (2 pieces) 50mm wide
A2 Armrest fully adjustable (2 pieces) 100mm wide
Example
page 218
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Driver seat
KFS 4
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
420
500 … 630
20°
890 … 990
130 … 280
314
480 … 580 410
255 335
450
150
290
210
8,5
Floor mounting
page 219
3
Driver seat
KFS 8
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The crane driver`s seat KFS 8 is a static seat with ergonomically
designed and provides a high grade of comfort.
The driver`s seat is equipped with roller-bearing swivel system.
All adjustment controls are positioned ergonomically within easy access.
The metal parts are protected against corrosion and painted black.
Technical data:
Horizontal adjustment 150mm
Inclination of the backrest max. 28°
Height adjustment 65mm
KFS 82 – A1 – S1 – U
Driver seat
KFS 82 Driver seat with textile cover grey / black
Attachments
K Headrest
A1 Armrest fully adjustable (2 pieces) 50mm wide
A2 Armrest fully adjustable (2 pieces) 100mm wide
S1 Safety belt 2-point mounting (automatic)
S3 Safety belt 2-point mounting (static)
U Base frame (Apron)
Example
page 220
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Driver seat
KFS 8
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
216
325
9
510…760
28°
7×4°
480…610
450
75 75
horizontal
adjustment
560
210 ±30*
742 ±30*
490
Seat swivelled
90° (right)
endpoints
to lock
weight loaded
Mounting dimensions
of the seat rails
2/139
2014
* adjustable
page 221
3
Driver seat
KFS 9
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The crane driver`s seat KFS 9 is ergonomically designed and provides a
high grade of comfort.
The driver`s seat is a low level mechanical suspension seat with an
oil-hydraulic vibration absorption system with weight adjustment.
Upon request, a pneumatic vibrating system with weight adjustment is
available.
All adjustment controls are positioned ergonomically within easy
access.
The metal parts are protected against corrosion and painted black.
Technical data
Suspension stoke 80mm
Weight adjustment 50 – 150kg (pneumatic)
50 – 130kg (mechanical)
Horizontal adjustment 160mm
Inclination of the backrest max. 90°
Height and slope adjustment 60mm
KFS 92 – A1 – L2 – S1 – P
Driver seat
KFS 91 Driver seat with air-permeable artificial leather cover black
KFS 92 Driver seat with textile cover grey / black
Attachments
K Headrest rain
A1 Armrest adjustable (2 pieces) 50mm wide
A2 Armrest continuously adjustable (2 pieces) 100mm wide
L1 Lumbar support manual adjustment – 2 movement
L2 Lumbar support manual adjustment – 4 movement
B Seat allocation recognition
H Seat cushion and backrest standard with heating element 24V DC 47W
S1 Safety belt 2 point fixing (automatic)
S2 Safety belt 4 point fixing (headrest required)
S3 Safety belt 2 point fixing (static)
V Seat cushion with V-cut (LD required!)
LD Horizontal adjustment dual (seat height +30mm!)
P Pneumatic vibration absorption system with weight adjustment (incl. compressor)
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment of seat adjustable +/-250mm
C1 Loose cover for driver seat KFS 9
C2 Loose cover for driver seat KFS 9 with V-cut
U Console (base)
Example
page 222
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Driver seat
KFS 9
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
322
304
9
660
304
600
90° stepless
80 80
horizontal
adjustment
310 ±30* 600
620
322
910 ±30*
weight loaded
201
540
152
Seat cushion
v-cutout
Mounting dimensions
of the seal rails
2/141
2014
* adjustable
page 223
3
Driver seat
KFS 10
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
KFS 102 – A1 – L2 – S2 – R1
Driver seat
KFS 101 Driver seat with air-permeable artificial leather cover black with V-cut
KFS 102 Driver seat with textile cover grey / black with V-cut
Attachments
K Headrest
A1 Armrest adjustable (2 pieces) 50mm wide
A2 Armrest continuously adjustable (2 pieces) 100mm wide
L1 Lumbar support manual adjustment – 2 movement
L2 Lumbar support manual adjustment – 4 movement
B Seat allocation recognition
H Seat cushion and backrest with heating element 24V DC 47W
S1 Safety belt 2 point fixing (automatic)
S2 Safety belt 4 point fixing (headrest required)
S3 Safety belt 2 point fixing (static)
U Console (base)
C3 Loose cover for driver seat KFS 10 with V-cut
R1 Price reduction pneumatic vibration absorption system
R2 Seat cushion without V-cut
The crane driver`s seat KFS 10 is ergonomically designed and provides
a high grade of comfort.
The driver`s seat has a pneumatic vibration absorption system with
weight adjustment by compressor (24V DC 8 Ampere) and a standard
seat cushion V-cut.
Through its three horizontal adjustment, it can be flexibly adapted to
very many applications.
All adjustment controls are positioned ergonomically within easy
access.
The metal parts are protected against corrosion and painted black.
Technical data:
Suspension stoke 80mm
Weight adjustment 50 – 150kg (pneumatic)
50 – 130kg (mechanical)
Horizontal adjustment
Seat with suspension system 160mm
Seat part individual 240mm
Seat cushion 160mm
Inclination of the backrest max. 90°
Height and slope adjustment 40mm
Example
page 224
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Driver seat
KFS 10
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
322
304
9
370 ±20* 600
970 ±20*
530
620
Pneumatic
suspension system
by compressor
weight loaded
480…610
510
-160
90° stepless
60
Vertical adjustment
mechanical/manual
80 80
40 200
Horizontal
adjustment seat
with suspension system
Horizontal
adjustment seat
with backrest
160
Horizontal adjustment
only seat cushion
201
540
152
Seat cushion
V-cutout
* adjustable
2/143
2014
Mounting dimensions seat
page 225
3
Driver seat
KFS 11
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The crane driver`s seat KFS 11 is ergonomically designed and provides
a high grade of comfort.
The driver`s seat is a low level mechanical suspension seat with an
oil-hydraulic vibration absorption system with weight adjustment.
All adjustment controls are positioned ergonomically within easy
access.
The metal parts are protected against corrosion and painted black.
Technical data
Suspension stoke 80mm
Weight adjustment 50 – 150kg
Horizontal adjustment 230mm
Inclination of the backrest -12°/+40°
Slope adjustment -10°/+12°
Height adjustment 65mm
KFS 11 – A1 – S1
Driver seat
KFS 11 Driver seat with textile cover grey / black
Attachments
K Headrest
A1 Armrest adjustable (2 pieces) 50mm wide
A2 Armrest continuously adjustable (2 pieces) 100mm wide
H Seat cushion and backrest with heating element 24V DC 47W
S1 Safety belt 2 point fixing (automatic)
S3 Safety belt 2 point fixing (static)
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment of seat adjustable +/-250mm
C4 Loose cover for driver seat KFS 11 / KFS 12
U Console (base)
Example
page 226
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Driver seat
KFS 11
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
225
390
10,50
560 …. 970 30°
Horizontal
adjustment
100 100
Mounting base
dimensions
Mounting dimensions
of the seat rails
490
590
220 290 ±30 * 630
1140 ±30 *
225
265
9
216
358
10
20
Special equipment
Floor mounting plate
730
1140 ±30 *
Armrest 100mm wide
555 95
20
215
3 x 330 = 690
720
2 x 215 = 430
460
Countersink DIN74-A4
Driver seat KFS 11
* adjustable
page 227
3
Driver seat
KFS 12
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The crane driver`s seat KFS 12 is ergonomically designed and provides
a high grade of comfort.
The driver’s seat is equipped with an air-sprung vibration system.
The weight adjustment is infinitely.
Heated seats 24V, lumbar support, seat cushion adjustment, seat allocation
recognition and headrest are included in the standard delivery.
All adjustment controls are positioned ergonomically within easy
access.
The metal parts are protected against corrosion and painted black.
Technical data:
Suspension stoke 80mm
Weight adjustment 50 – 150kg
Horizontal adjustment 230mm
Inclination of the backrest -12°/+40°
Slope adjustment -10°/+12°
Height adjustment 100mm
Seat cushion adjustment 60mm
KFS 12 – A1 – S1
Driver seat
KFS 12 Driver seat with textile cover grey / black
Attachments
A1 Armrest adjustable (2 pieces) 50mm wide
A2 Armrest continuously adjustable (2 pieces) 100mm wide
S1 Safety belt 2 point fixing (automatic)
S3 Safety belt 2 point fixing (static)
LK Plate for horizontal manual adjustment of seat adjustable +/-250mm
C4 Loose cover for driver seat KFS 11 / KFS 12
U Console (base)
Example
page 228
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Driver seat
KFS 12
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
lumbar support
225
390
10,50
560 …. 970
40°
Horizontal
adjustment
100 100
Mounting base
dimensions
Mounting dimensions
of the seat rails
490
590
220 290 ±30 * 630
1140 ±30 *
225
265
9
216
358
10
20
Special equipment
Floor mounting plate
730
1140 ±30 *
Armrest 100mm wide
555 95
20
215
3 x 330 = 690
720
2 x 215 = 430
460
Countersink DIN74-A4
Driver seat KFS 12
* adjustable
page 229
3
Ordering information
Customer Order No.
Equipment box left Pos.
No.
Type Colour Label text (max.
2 x 12 characters)
Plant
ref.
Destination
Notes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Maximum installation of command and
indicating devices 22 (see p.188) in
our control units and housings if our
multi-axis controllers V62 (see p.1) are
used. Additional command and indicating
devices can be installed of multi-axis
controllers V64 or V11 (see p.1 or p.6)
are used. (please enquire)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Control unit (see p. 189)
Type
No. of
pieces max.
KST 3 1 – 6, 8 – 13, 15 – 18 16
KST 41/181 1 – 5, 10 – 12 8
KST 42/182 1 – 5, 8 – 12, 15 – 17 13
KST 51/151 3 – 7, 10 – 14, 15 – 19, 20 – 24 20
KST 52/53/54/152/154 1 -24 24
KST 6 3 – 4, 10 – 11, 15 – 16 6
KST 7 1 – 24 24
KST 75 1 – 19 19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
9
8
1
4
2
3
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
page 230
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Ordering information
Customer Order No.
Pos.
No.
Type Colour Label text (max).
2 x 12 characters)
Plant
ref.
Destination
Notes Equipment box right
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Maximum installation of command and
indicating devices 22 (see p.188) in
our control units and housings if our
multi-axis controllers V62 (see p.1)
are used. Additional command and
indicating devices can be installed if
multi-axis controllers V64 or V11 (see
p.1 or p.6) are used. (please enquire)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
No. of
pieces max.
Control unit (see p.189)
Type
25 – 30, 32 – 37, 39 – 42 16 KST 3
25 – 29, 34 – 36 8 KST 41/181
25 – 29, 32 – 36, 39 – 41 13 KST 42/182
27 – 31, 34 – 38, 39 – 43, 44 – 48 20 KST 51/151
25 – 48 24 KST 52/53/54/152/154
27 – 28, 34 – 35, 39 – 40 6 KST 6
25 – 48 24 KST 7
25 – 43 19 KST 75
32 25
33 26
44 39 34 27
45 40
46
47
48 43
42
41
35
36
37
38 31
30
29
28
5
8
6
7
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
page 231
3
Ordering information KST 8, 85
Customer Order No.
Equipment box left Pos.
No.
Type Colour Lable text (max).
2 x 12 characters)
Plant
ref.
Destination
Notes
Max. 6 pcs.
installation of
command and
indicating devices
22 (see
p.188) or 1
pcs. monitoring
device
72 x 72mm
1
2
3
4
5
Multi-axis
controller V64
(see p.1) or
V11 (see p.6)
6
7
8
Max. 3 pcs.
installation of
command and
indicating devices
22 (see
p.188)
9
10
11
Place to put
on devices
12
Equipment box right
Max. 6 pcs.
installation of
command and
indicating devices
22 (see
p.188) or 1
pcs. monitoring
device
72 x 72mm
13
14
15
16
17
Multi-axis
controller V64
(see p.1) or
V11 (see p.6)
18
19
20
Max. 3 pcs.
installation of
command and
indicatin devices
22 (see
p.188)
21
22
23
Place to put
on devices
24
19
1 3 5
2 4 6
1
4
2
3
13 15 17
14 16 18
5
6
7 8
20 21
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
page 232
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Ordering information KST 10
Customer Order No.
Equipment box left Pos.
No.
Type Colour Label text (max.
2 x 12 characters)
Plant
ref.
Destination
Notes
1
Max. 3 pcs.
installation of
command and
indicating
devices 22
(see p.188)
2
3
4
5
6
Multi-axis controller
V11,
V14, V25, V85
7
8
9
Max. 3 pcs.
installation of
command and
indicating
devices 22
(see p.188)
Equipment box right
13
Max. 3 pcs.
installation of
command and
indicating
devices 22
(see p.188)
14
15
16
17
18
Multi-axis controller
V11,
V14, V25, V85
Max. 3 pcs.
installation of
command and
indicating
devices 22
(see p.188)
1 2 3
1
3 4
2
4 5 6
10 11 12
13 14 15
5
8
6
7
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
page 233
3
Order information KST 19
Customer Order No.
Equipment box left Pos.
No.
Type Colour Label text (max.
2 x 12 characters)
Plantref.
Destination
Notes
Multi-axis controller V11, V14, V25, V85
see p. 6, 37, 28, 14
1
2
max. 7 installations of command and
indicating devices 22 (see p.188) 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Equipment box right
Multi-axis controller V11, V14, V25, V85
see p. 6, 37, 28, 14
25
26
max. 7 installations of command and
indicating devices 22 (see p.188) 27
28
29
30
31
1
4
2
3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ +
+
25
26 27
28
29
30
31
+
5
8
6
7
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
page 234
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Portable control unit
TS 1
Cable and wiring
Cable Oelflex 18x1mm 13,4mm Ø -5°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Oelflex 25x1mm 15,4mm Ø -5°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Oelflex 34x1mm 18,6mm Ø -5°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Neonflex 18x1mm 19,2mm Ø -30°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Neonflex 24x1mm 22,1mm Ø -30°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Neonflex 38x1mm 26,1mm Ø -30°C to +80°C each meter
KLS Wired on connector / plug in socket per core
KLK Wiring for cable per core
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The portable control unit TS 1 is used for controlling and monitoring the necessary
equipment.
The chest panel and straps enable the operator to carry it without becoming tired.
An adjustable carrying strap can also be fitted for use without the chest plate.
Surface treatment:
Priming and structure-finishing paint
Standard colour RAL 7032 pepple-grey
Technical data:
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP54
TS 1 – SB 1 – RH 1 – K 4 – HS 1 / V… / KLS / X
Basic unit
TS 1 With chest plate and straps
TS 11 With straps
Attachment
SB 1 Legs for control unit alu-tube 2 pieces
SB 2 Legs for control unit stainless steel-tube V2 A 2 pieces
RH 1 Reeling hooks for control unit stainless steel V2 A
K 1 Cable entry M32 cable 11-21mm
K 2 Cable entry M40 cable 19-28mm
K 3 Cable entry 180° swiveling M32 cable 11-21mm
K 4 Cable entry 180° swiveling M40 cable 19-28mm
HS 1 Plug in socket 16-pole male insert HAN 16E without wiring
HB 1 Connector 16-pole female insert HAN 16E without wiring
HS 2 Plug in socket 24-pole female insert HAN 24E without wiring
HB 2 Connector 24-pole female insert HAN 24E without wiring
HS 3 Plug in socket 32-pole male insert HAN 32E without wiring
HB 3 Connector 32-pole female insert HAN 32E without wiring
Indicating labels not engraved for multi-axis-/ single-axis controller
Mounting for equipment boxes
V Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S Single-axis controller (see page 86)
N Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Example
page 235
3
Portable control unit
TS 1
TS 1 – SB 1 – RH 1 – K 4 – HS 1 / V… / KLS / X
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X1 Housing antistatic design < 109 Ohm/cm
X2 Finishing colour yellow RAL 1021
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
page 236
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Portable control unit
TS 1
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
120 106
With chest plate and straps
Protection IP 65
with multi-axis controllers IP 54
Cable entry
with anti-kink protection
and stain relief or connectors
250
442
305
265
Direction of view
2
3 4
1 5
6
7 8
With adjustable carrying strap
Protection IP 65
with multi-axis controllers IP 54
page 237
3
Portable control unit
TS 2
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The portable control unit TS 2 is used for controlling and monitoring the necessary
equipment.
The chest panel and straps enable the operator to carry it without becoming tired.
An adjustable carrying strap can also be fitted for use without the chest plate.
Surface treatment:
Priming and structure-finishing paint
Standard colour RAL 7032 pepple-grey
Technical data:
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
TS 2 – SB 1 – RH 1 – K 4 – HS 1 / V… / KLS / X
Basic unit
TS 2 With chest plate, straps
TS 21 With straps
TS 22 With bracket and straps
Attachment
SB 1 Legs for control unit alu-tube 2 pieces
SB 2 Legs for control unit stainless steel-tube V2 A 2 pieces
RH 1 Reeling hooks for control unit stainless steel V2 A
K 1 Cable entry M32 cable 11-21mm
K 2 Cable entry M40 cable 19-28mm
K 3 Cable entry 180° swiveling M32 cable 11-21mm
K 4 Cable entry 180° swiveling M40 cable 19-28mm
HS 1 Plug in socket 16-pole male insert HAN 16E without wiring
HB 1 Connector 16-pole female insert HAN 16E without wiring
HS 2 Plug in socket 24-pole female insert HAN 24E without wiring
HB 2 Connector 24-pole female insert HAN 24E without wiring
HS 3 Plug in socket 32-pole male insert HAN 32E without wiring
HB 3 Connector 32-pole female insert HAN 32E without wiring
Indicating labels not engraved for multi-axis-/ single-axis controller
Indicating labels engraved for multi-axis-/ single-axis controller
Mounting for equipment boxes
V Multi-axis controller (see page 1)
S Single-axis controller (see page 86)
N Control-switch (see page 124)
… More command and indicating devices (see page 188)
Example
page 238
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Portable control unit
TS 2
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X1 Housing antistatic design < 109 Ohm/cm
X2 Finishing color yellow RAL 1021
TS 2 – SB 1 – RH 1 – K 4 – HS 1 / V… / KLS / X
Cable and wiring
Cable Oelflex 18x1mm 13,4mm Ø -5°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Oelflex 25x1mm 15,4mm Ø -5°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Oelflex 34x1mm 18,6mm Ø -5°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Neonflex 18x1mm 19,2mm Ø -30°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Neonflex 24x1mm 22,1mm Ø -30°C to +80°C each meter
Cable Neonflex 38x1mm 26,1mm Ø -30°C to +80°C each meter
KLS Wired on connector / plug in socket per core
KLK Wiring for cable per core
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
page 239
3
Portable control unit
TS 2
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
140 114
With chest plate and straps
Protection IP 65
with multi-axis controllers IP 54
Cable entry
with anti-kink protection
and stain relief or connectors
220 250
335
Direction of view
With adjustable carrying strap
Protection IP 65
with multi-axis controllers IP 54
120
With bracket and cable entry swivelling
Protection IP 65
with multi-axis controllers IP 54
Cable entry 180° swivelling
with anti-kink protection
and stain relief or connectors
464
page 240
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Control pedestal for offshore
U22 / 32
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The control pedestal U22 / 32 accomodate the devices necessary for control and
monitoring.
Ready wired, it can be quickly and easily installed on the sea deck.
The housing (pedestal head) is made of seawater-resistant aluminium.
Surface treatment:
Priming and structure-finishing paint
Standard colour RAL 7032 pepple-grey
Technical data:
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP66
U22 / 32 / N61…/ N62… / H / PW / 2D / PQ / KLV / X
Housing
U22/32 With 1 narrow side-plate with pillar-gasket
FD Side-plate narrow gasket
HD Side-plate wide gasket
(required for command and indicating devices)
KD Hinged side-plate with gasket that can be locked in position
IA
Monitoring devices cover with gasket for max. 2 monitors
72×72 mm or 4 monitors 72x36mm and max. 6
indicating devices pos. 28, 29
RS Pillar 108mm Ø 670mm height with flange quadratic or round
Masterswitch / Control-switch
N61 HG Masterswitch with ball handle and indicating labels
N62 KN Control-switch with knob and indicating label
Example
– HG – 01 Z P – A05 P134 – X
Axis 1: direction 3-4
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts z.B.
03 6 contacts A05 MS21
04 8 contacts A0500 MS21-00
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
page 241
3
Control pedestal for offshore
U22 / 32
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
U22 / 32 / N61…/N62… / H / PW / 2D / PQ / KLV / X
Command and indicating devices
H Heating 20 Watt 220 or 110V 50/60 Hz
PV Mushroom head push button latching 22 latching with indicating label 1 NC
P Mushroom head push button 22 with indicating label 1 NO
D Push button 22 with indicating label 1 NO
W Selector switch 0-1 22 with indicating label 1 NO
L Indicator light 22 with indicating label Diode 24 Volt
L Indicator light 22 with indicating label Diode 230 Volt AC
Contact block additional 1 S or 1 Ö
L Indicator light 22 with indicating label Diode 24 Volt protection IP65
L Indicator light 10 with indicating label Diode 24 Volt protection IP65
Display devices
PQ Powermeter PQ 72 1mA DC Engraved your instructions
PQI Powermeter PQ 72 1mA DC illuminated 24 Volt Engraved your instructions
PQ Powermeter PQ 72×36 1mA DC Engraved your instructions
PQI Powermeter PQ 72×36 1mA DC illuminated 24 Volt Engraved your instructions
EQ Amperemeter EQ 72 100/200/1A Engraved your instructions
EQI Amperemeter EQ 72 100/200/1A illuminated 24 Volt Engraved your instructions
EQ Amperemeter EQ 72×36 100/200/1A Engraved your instructions
EQI Amperemeter EQ 72×36 100/200/1A illuminated 24 Volt Engraved your instructions
Wiring
KLV on terminal block 2,5mm² with wire line 0,75mm²
Special model
X Special / customer specified
page 242
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Control pedestal for offshore
U22 / 32
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
670 220 160
985
Reed 108×4
B
A A
side-plate
narrow
side-plate
wide
90 320 90
232
212
side-plate
narrow
side-plate
wide
170
140
125
M12x20 deep Gasket
(Helicoil)
View B
220
180
18
A-A
Floor mounting
flange
200
250
18
Optional
plate
2/161
2014
mounting at
the bottom
page 243
3
Control pedestal for offshore
U23 / 23
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The control pedestal U23 / 23 accomodate the devices necessary for control and
monitoring.
Ready wired, it can be quickly and easily installed on the sea deck. The housing
(pedestal head) is made of seawater-resistant aluminium.
Surface treatment:
Priming and structure-finishing paint
Standard colour RAL 7032 pepple-grey
Technical data:
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP66
Example
U23 / 23 / N61…/N62… / H / PW / 2D / PQ / KLV / X
Housing
U23/23 With 1 narrow side-plate with pillar-gasket
U23/23A Side-plate narrow gasket
IA
Monitoring devices cover with gasket for max. 2 monitors
72x72mm or 4 monitors 72x36mm and max. 6
indicating devices pos. 28, 29
RS Pillar 108mm Ø 670mm height with flange quadratic or round
Masterswitch / Control-switch
N61 HG Masterswitch with ball handle and indicating labels
N62 KN Control-switch with knob and indicating label
– HG – 01 Z P – A05 P134 – X
Axis 1: direction 3-4
(Standard contacts gold-plated 2A 250V AC15)
01 2 contacts Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
02 4 contacts z.B.
03 6 contacts A05 MS21
04 8 contacts A0500 MS21-00
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
P Potentiometer P131 T396 2×0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P132 T396 2x1kOhm l max. 1mA
P133 T396 2x2kOhm l max. 1mA
P134 T396 2x5kOhm l max. 1mA
P135 T396 2x10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
page 244
V2017/1 03.04.2017
3
Control pedestal for offshore
U23 / 23
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
U23 / 23 / N61…/N62… / H / PW / 2D / PQ / KLV / X
Command and indicating devices
H Heating 20 Watt 220 or 110V 50/60 Hz
PV Mushroom head push button latching 22 latching with indicating label 1 NC
P Mushroom head push button 22 with indicating label 1 NO
D Push button 22 with indicating label 1 NO
W Selector switch 0–1 22 with indicating label 1 NO
L Indicator light 22 with indicating label Diode 24 Volt
L Indicator light 22 with indicating label Diode 230 Volt AC
Contact block additional 1S or 1Ö
L Indicator light 22 with indicating label Diode 24 Volt protection IP65
L Indicator light 10 with indicating label Diode 24 Volt protection IP65
Display devices
PQ Powermeter PQ 72 1mA DC Engraved your instructions
PQI Powermeter PQ 72 1mA DC illuminated 24 Volt Engraved your instructions
PQ Powermeter PQ 72×36 1mA DC Engraved your instructions
PQI Powermeter PQ 72×36 1mA DC illuminated 24 Volt Engraved your instructions
EQ Amperemeter EQ 72 100/200/1A Engraved your instructions
EQI Amperemeter EQ 72 100/200/1A illuminated 24 Volt Engraved your instructions
EQ Amperemeter EQ 72×36 100/200/1A Engraved your instructions
EQI Amperemeter EQ 72×36 100/200/1A illuminated 24 Volt Engraved your instructions
Wiring
KLV on terminal block 2,5mm² with wire line 0,75mm²
Special model
X Special / customer specified
page 245
3
Control pedestal for offshore
U23 / 23
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Reed 108×4
670 115 135
902
B
A A
140
200
230
125 li
M12x20 deep
(Helicoil)
View B
Gasket
Mounting at
the bottom
Ø9
Mounting
at the top
18
180
220
A-A
Floor mounting
flange
200
250
18
12
Optional
plate
170
135
Protection with
narrow cover
2/163
2014
4
Naval cruise controller
AZ1
Example
page 246
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The naval cruise controller AZ1 is a rugged switching device.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The design includes:
The mechanical control-system for the engine speed 0-max. rpm. switching angle 60
degrees with pressure print at 7 degrees and friction brake direction 0-2.
The mechanical control-system for the steering left/right direction 13-14, 360 degrees
with pressure points 4×90 degrees and friction brake.
The AZ1 is resistant to oil, maritime climate, ozone and UV radiation.
Technical data
Mechanical life AZ 1 12 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP66
AZ1 – L – N E2112 – X
Basic unit
AZ1 Naval cruise controller
Options
L Scale illuminated (LED) 24V dimmable
N Follow-up control system 24 Volt DC for direction 0-2 and 13-14
Interface
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Characteristic: 1 = Inverse dual, 2 = Dual
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant per axis 1 axis E103 1
2 axis 2
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32V DC)
Characteristic: 1 = Inverse dual, 2 = Dual
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant per axis 1 axis E111 1
2 axis 2
Output power
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Characteristic: 1 = Inverse dual, 2 = Dual
4…12…20mA redundant per axis 1 axis E211 1
2 axis 2
Special model
X Special / customer specified
4
Naval cruise controller
AZ1
145
137
+1
102,50
4,5
Hole pattern
289,50
136
Edition:
with motor rosseting control system
Plug-in socket/
connector
155
136
197
141
50
68
66
41
60°
detent point 7°
Installation
depth with
distance washer
Installation depth
without distance
washer
Friction brake
engine speed
Friction break
steering
13 14
Steering 360°, with detent 4 x 90°
3/051
page 247
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
4
Pedal-controller
P7 / PP7
The pedal-controller P7 and PP7 is a rugged switching devices for footing applications.
The pedal-controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV radiation
typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life P7 6 million operating cycles
Mechanical life PP7 10 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection P7 IP54
Degree of protection PP7 IP65
Colour RAL 7032 pebble-grey
P7 – 1 Z P – A01 P124 -X
Basic unit
P7 Pedal-controller
Reinforced version
PP7 Pedal-controller
Detent
Without
R2 0-2
R3 0-3
R4 0-4
R11 1-0-1
R22 2-0-2
Direction 1-2
1 1 contact Standard contact – Arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts z.B.
3 3 contacts MS11 A01
4 4 contacts* MS12 A02
5 5 contacts* MS13 A03
6 6 contacts* MS14 A04
*Only possible without potentiometer! MS21 A05
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P121 T374 0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P122 T374 1kOhm l max. 1mA
P123 T374 2kOhm l max. 1mA
P124 T374 5kOhm l max. 1mA
P125 T374 10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on demand!
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
page 248
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
4
Pedal-controller
P7 / PP7
47 195
90
250
175
25°
48
165
12,5° 12,5°
Cable entry M20
Mounting outside 90
9
(4 x M8)
Mounting inside 80
100
5,5
(4 x M5x50)
115
12,5 50 7,5
3 /100
page 249
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
4
Pedal-controller
P8 / PP8
The pedal-controller P8 and PP8 is a rugged switching devices for footing applications.
The pedal-controller is resistant to oil, maritime conditions e.g. offshore /vessels, UV
radiation typically from the sun.
Technical data
Mechanical life P8 6 million operating cycles
Mechanical life PP8 10 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection P8 IP54
Degree of protection PP8 IP65
Colour RAL 7032 pebble-grey
P8 – 1 Z P – A01 P124 -X
Basic unit
P8 Pedal-controller
Reinforced version
PP8 Pedal-controller
Detent
without
R2 0-2
R3 0-3
R4 0-4
Direction 1-2
1 1 contact Standard contact – Arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts z.B.
3 3 contacts MS11 A01
4 4 contacts* MS12 A02
5 5 contacts* MS13 A03
6 6 contacts* MS14 A04
*Only possible without potentiometer! A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Mounting options for potentiometer and encoder (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P121 T374 0,5kOhm l max. 1mA
P122 T374 1kOhm l max. 1mA
P123 T374 2kOhm l max. 1mA
P124 T374 5kOhm l max. 1mA
P125 T374 10kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on demand!
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
page 250
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
4
Pedal-controller
P8 / PP8
195
300
175
85
85
Cable entry M20
Mounting outside 90
9
(4 x M8)
Mounting inside 80
100
5,5
(4 x M5x50)
115
155
12,5 50 7,5
3 /102
page 251
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
4
Pedal-controller
P10/P11/P12
page 252
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The pedal-controller P10/P11/P12 is a rugged switching device for electro-hydraulic.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The P10/P11/P12 is resistant to oil, maritime, climate, ozone and UV radiation.
Technical data
Mechanical life P10 8 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection P10 IP54
P10 – 1 Z P – A01 P224 – B – X
Basic unit
P10 Pedal-controller, 0-30°
P11 Pedal-controller, 15°-0-15°
P12 Pedal-controller, 0-15°
Detent
Without
R4 1-0-1
Direction 1-2
1 1 contact Standard contact – arrangement see page 131
2 2 contacts z.B.
3 3 contacts MS11 A01
MS12 A02
MS13 A03
MS21 A05
A99 contact – arrangement according customer request
Z Spring return
R Friction brake
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P222 T362 1kOhm l max. 1mA
P223 T362 2kOhm l max. 1mA
P224 T362 5kOhm l max. 1mA
More potentiometers on request!
Cover housing
B Cover housing with cable entry M20
Special model
X Special / customer specified
Example
4
Pedal-controller
P10/P11/P12
92
M6
76,5
Hole pattern
65
90
(Cover housing)
220
100
A 120
15° 15°
IP 54
IP 65
Cable outlet
(According to board)
100
84
30
64,4
33,5
170
15°
0
P12
IP 54
IP 65
84
100
40
3 / 104
P10/P11
page 253
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
4
Pedal-controller
P20
page 254
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The pedal-controller P20 is a rugged switching device for electro-hydraulic.
The modular design enables the switching device to be used universally.
The P20 is resistant to oil, maritime, climate, ozone and UV radiation.
Technical data
Mechanical life P20 10 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection P20 IP67 (electronic)
Functional safety PLd (EN ISO 13849) possible
P20 – 1 – ZZ – E1041 – S… – X
Basic unit
P20 Pedal-controller
Pedal
1 Pedal shape A 0-15°
2 Pedal shape B 0-25°
3 Pedal shape C 15°-0-15°
4 Pedal shape C 0-15°
Spring return
Z Spring return
ZZ Spring return redundant
Interfaces (description see on the following pages)
E 0xx Switching output
E 1xx Voltage output
E 2xx Current output
E 3xx CAN-interface
E 4xx CANopen Safety interface
Plug connectors
S… Standard plug connectors (see page 129)
Special model
X Special / customer specifi ed
Example
4
Pedal-controller
P20
page 255
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Digital output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) E001 1
1 direction signal + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) E003 1
Voltage output (not stabilized)
Supply voltage 4,75-5,25V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 8mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals E104 1
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 1 direction signal E145 1
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual 1
Dual 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° 4
Voltage output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC (*11,5-32V)
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) E112 1
0,5…2,5…4,5V redundant + 1 direction signal + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated) E146 1
0…5…10V redundant + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), supply voltage
11,5 – 32V DC E132 1
0…5…10V redundant + 1 direction signal + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), supply voltage
11,5 – 32V DC E147 1
10…0…10V + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), supply voltage 11,5 – 32V DC,
sensor redundant with error monitoring and error signal E136 1
Output options
Characteristic:
Inverse dual *􀈻 1
Dual *􀈻 2
Inverse dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 3
Dual with dead zone +/- 3° *􀈻 4
*􀈻 not combinable with output E136X
Single *􀈼 5
Single with dead zone *􀈼 6
*􀈼 not combinable with output E1121 and E1321,
E1461 und E1471
Voltage output with other value on request!
4
Pedal-controller
P20
page 256
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Current output
Supply voltage 9-32V DC
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 150mA
Zero position signal 500mA
Wiring Cable 500mm long without plug connector
Optional with plug connector (standard plug connectors see page 129) S
0…10…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), sensor redundant with error
monitoring and error signal E206 1
0…20mA + 1 direction signal + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), sensor redundant with error monitoring
and error signal E222 1
20…0…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), sensor redundant with error
monitoring and error signal E208 1
4…12…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), sensor redundant with error
monitoring and error signal E214 1
4…20mA + 1 direction signal + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), sensor redundant with error monitoring
and error signal E223 1
20…4…20mA + 2 direction signals + 1 zero position signal (galvanically isolated), sensor redundant with error
monitoring and error signal E216 1
Output options
Single 5
Single with dead zone +/- 3° 6
Current output with other value on request!
CAN
Supply voltage 9-36V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Protocol CANopen CiA DS 301 or SAE J 1939
Baud rate 125kBit/s to 1Mbit/s (standard 250 kBit/s)
Output value 0…255 / 255…0…255
Wiring CAN (IN) cable 500mm with plug connector M12 (male)
CAN (OUT) cable 500mm with plug connector M12 (female)
CAN P20 E307 1
With additional digital output separately wired (not via CAN)
– 1 direction signal 2
CANopen Safety
Supply voltage 9-36V DC
Idle current consumption 120mA
Current carrying capacity Direction signal 100mA
Protocol 125kBit/s bis 1MBit/s (standard 250 kBit/s)
Baud rate 0…255 / 255…0…255
Ausgangswert CANopen Safety CIA 304
Wiring CAN (IN) Kabel 500mm mit Stecker M12 (Stifte)
CAN (OUT) Kabel 500mm mit Stecker M12 (Buchse)
CANopen Safety P20 E407 1
With additional digital outputs separately wired (not via CAN)
– 1 direction signal 2
Attachments
Z01 Mating connector M12 male insert with 2m cable 20201140
Z02 Mating connector M12 female insert with 2m cable 20202298
4
Pedal-controller
P20
page 257
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
32,75
61,5
21
126
215
25°
55
236,6
73
90
93
155
175
57
6,3
(4xM6)
61,5
21
32,75
60
194
15°
63
192,3
155
175
73
91
93
6,3
(4xM6)
46
220
70
95
32,7
61,5
175
114
110
15°
15°
21
93
73
155
6,3
3 /
Pedal form A Pedal form B
Pedal form C
4
Gear limit switch
GE 1 / GE 2
page 258
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The gear limit switch GE 1 / GE 2 is a rugged switching device designed for hoisting
applications.
The modular micro changeover contacts with positive opening operation.
The device is programmed by means of stepless adjustment of double cam discs, which
can be provided from 18° to 192° contact discs according to the switching program
required.
The type GE 1 includes a double cam disc conjointly lockable.
The type GE 1 includes a double cam disc conjointly lockable.
Technical data
Mechanical life GE1/GE2 10 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP65
Colour RAL 7032 pebble grey
GE 1 – 10 – 4 – P – U7 – P – 18 – 30 – 60 – 90 – X
Basic unit
GE 1 Gear limit switch GE 1 with mounting flange
GE 2 Gear limit switch GE 2 with mounting flange
Gearing
Ratios: 2:1 to 10:1 example: 10:1 => 10
11:1 to 20:1
21:1 to 40:1
41:1 to 80:1
81:1 to 160:1
161:1 to 320:1
Limit switch
2 2 contacts
3 3 contacts
4 4 contacts
5 5 contacts
6 6 contacts
7 7 contacts
8 8 contacts
9 9 contacts
10 10 contacts
11 11 contacts
12 12 contacts
13 13 contacts
14 14 contacts
15 15 contacts
16 16 contacts
(P) Possibility of mounting potentiometer (Gessmann-types)
P Potentiometer P451 PW70 0,5kOhm l max. 30mA
P452 PW70 1kOhm l max. 30mA
P453 PW70 2kOhm l max. 30mA
P454 PW70 5kOhm l max. 30mA
P455 PW70 10kOhm l max. 30mA
More potentiometers on request!
Example
4
Gear limit switch
GE 1 / GE 2
page 259
Technical details may vary based on confi guration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
GE 1 – 10 – 4 – P – U7 – P – 18 – 30 – 60 – 90 – X
Aluminium housing
U5 U17/13 170x130mm (max. 8 contacts GE 1)
U6 U16/16 160x160mm (max. 12 contacts GE 1/ max. 6 contacts GE 2)
U7 U16/20 160x200mm (max. 16 contacts GE 1/max. 10 v GE 2)
U8 U16/26 160x260mm (max. 16 contacts GE2)
U9 U16/35 160x350mm
Program-disc
Following program-discs are available :
18°, 24°, 30°, 36°, 45°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 110°, 120°, 176°, 192°
Example:
Contact 1: program-discs pair 18° (adjustment range 18°-36°)
Contact 2: program-discs pair 30° (adjustment range 30°-60°)
Contact 3: program-discs pair 60° (adjustment range 60°-120°)
Contact 4: program-discs pair 90° (adjustment range 90°-180°)
Contact n:
Illustration
The programm-discs are infi nitely adjustable within 360°
Special model
X Special / customer specifi ed
4
Gear limit switch
GE 1 / GE 2
F
E
Protection IP 65
A for GE1
B for GE2
36,5 …44,5
ever to gearing
10
Cover plate 4 …8
33,9
C
D
12
h9
G
50
10
10
Cable entry
M25 each side
Ø7 for floor mounting
70
41
41
M6
Build-on flange
3 / 201
Type Dim. C Dim. D Dim. E Dim. F Dim. G
U17/13 170 130 90 35,5 75
U16/16 160 160 91 45 70
U16/20 160 200 100 45 70
U16/26 160 260 91 45 70
U16/35 160 350 100 45 70
Type No. of
contacts
Dim. A
(GE1)
Dim. B
(GE2)
1 1 32 35,5
2 2 38,5 42
3 3 44,5 48
4 4 50,5 54
5 5 56,5 60
6 6 63 66,5
7 7 69 72,5
8 8 75 78,5
9 9 81 84,5
10 10 87 90,5
11 11 93 96,5
12 12 99 102,5
13 13 105,5 109
14 14 111,5 115
15 15 117,5 121
16 16 123,5 127
page 260
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
4
DC-Contact
SO 1.10 Normally closed (NC)
SS 1.10 Normally open (NO)
page 261
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The DC contact block is used for signalling and annunciation applications.
The snap-action mechanism prevents slow contact opening when the plunger is operated
slowly. Quenching of the arc that occurs with DC is supported by two-capacity permanent
magnets.
These are arranged so that the polarity can be ignored when connecting +/- cabling.
However, the polarity of the quenching magnets must be noted when installing the contact
blocks to prevent the magnets adversely affecting each other. Contact blocks in four different
colours are available for polarity identification of the magnets when fitted.
The contact blocks may only be installed on non-magnetisable materials with screw, etc.
made of non-ferrous metal.
The self-cleaning silver contacts are designed for low switching frequency, low currents
and voltages. Gold coated contacts can be supplied (approx 0,2μ), less than 42 Volt
required. The screw connection M3.5 at the side is suitable for 2 conductors max.
2,5mm². The plug-in connection at the top 4.8 x 0.8mm DIN 46247.
Several contact blocks can be plugged on the top of each other and operated jointly. The
plug-type terminals are then only accessible on the top unit. The contact blocks can be
provided with shock protection to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100.
Switching capacity
NC NO Time constant
250V DC 2A 1A 20ms
125V DC 4A 3A 20ms
50V DC 6A 6A 20ms
30V DC 10A 10A 20ms
250V AC 15 6A 6A
Technical data
Mechanical life 2 million operating cycles
Electrical service life 50.000 operating cycles (at 2A 250V DC L/R
20ms)
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP40
SO 1.10 – B – R – F – X
Basic unit
SO1.10 DC-contact normally closed (NC)
Colour code grey or blue
SS1.10 DC-contact normally open (NO)
Colour code yellow or green
Attachment
B Shock protection KEG 142 to DIN VDE 0106 part 100
R Roller lever
K Toggle lever (switching is one direction only)
F Plug-in connection at side 4,8 x 0,8mm (2 pieces)
AU Contacts gold-coated approx. 0,5
Special model
X Special / customer specified
X1 Contact without quenching magnets
Example
4
DC-Contact
SO 1.10 Normally closed (NC)
SS 1.10 Normally open (NO)
9
10,2 0,8
5,7
1,5
8
7 23
20
1,4
47
62
3,2
10,5
10,2
8,9
11,4
10,6
9
55
3,2
Normally
closed (NC)
1 2 3
Normally
open (NO)
1 2 3
Shock protection
Contact travels ± 0,2
1 Plunger zero position
2 Reversing point
3 Switching point
Operating force
2,2 N ± 20 %
10
4,8
4,8
8
16,5
19
23
20,6
19,3
23
21
19,5
19
Normally
closed (NC)
1 2 3
Normally
open (NO)
1 2 3
with roller lever
Contact travels ± 0,2
8
21,9
31,5
28,8
27,3
31,5
29,2
27,6
Normally
closed (NC)
1 2 3
Normally
open (NO)
1 2 3
with toggle lever
Contact travels ± 0,3
3 / 401
page 262
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
4
Signal-cam controller NU 1
page 263
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
The cam controller NU 1 is used as a signal and annunciation switch in HV systems.
This rugged switching device has cam discs made of insulation material that can be set at
10° intervals.
The DC contact blocks are designed to permit series assembly, which can be operated
simultaneously.
Technical data
Mechanical life NU1 2 million operating cycles
Operation temperature -40°C to +60°C
Degree of protection IP40 / IP65 with aluminium housing
NU1 – 4 – 4 – F2 – Z – W – A – X
Basic unit
NU 1 Signal-cam controller
Contacts (1. range)
2 2 contacts
4 4 contacts
6 6 contacts
8 8 contacts
10 10 contacts
12 12 contacts
14 14 contacts
16 16 contacts
Contacts (2. range)
2 2 contacts
4 4 contacts
6 6 contacts
8 8 contacts
10 10 contacts
12 12 contacts
14 14 contacts
16 16 contacts
Switching capacity NC NO Time constant
250V DC 2A 1A 20ms
125V DC 4A 3A 20ms
50V DC 6A 6A 20ms
30V DC 10A 10A 20ms
250V DC15 6A 6A
Example
4
Signal-cam controller NU 1
page 264
V2017/1 04.03.2017
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
NU1 – 4 – 4 – F2 – Z – W – A – X
Option
F1 1 free shaft-end with hexagonal 12mm
F2 2 free shaft-end diameter 12mm
F3 2 free shaft-end with hexagonal 12mm
Z Spring return
W Mounting angles (2 pieces)
GH Link lever
A Cover housing off Astralon
Til installation size 4 contacts
Til installation size 8 contacts
Til installation size 12 contacts
Til installation size 16 contacts
B Shock protection KEG 142 for single contact
Aluminium housing
U11 U23/20 232x202mm (max. 10 contacts)
U12 U23/28 232x280mm (max. 16 contacts)
Housing only possible with single-row version contacts
Special model
X Special / customer specified
4
Signal-cam controller NU 1
12 1,50
Mounting angles
Plastic cover
(80 mm wide)
Link lever
35
12h9 standard
or 12 mm hexagonal
41
A
56
4 94
C
100
Ø7
M8
68
102
72
40
Mounting at top
15,50
5,70
40
M6
Plug in connection
4,8×0,8
Screw connection
M3,5
F
G
180
232
31
7
Aluminuim housing
protection IP 65
40
35
111
M6
3 / 403
View with mounting series contacts
on top, without plastic-cover
Type No. of
contacts Dim. A Dim. C Housing Dim. F Dim. G
2 2 7 74
U 23/20 180 202
4 4 70 95
6 6 91 117
8 8 113 138
10 10 134 159
12 12 155 180
14 14 176 201 U 23/28 260 280
16 16 197 222
page 265
Technical details may vary based on configuration or application! Technical data subject to change without notice!
Headquarters
and locations of Gessmann Group
Headquarters
Gessmann Group
W. Gessmann GmbH
Postfach 11 51
74207 Leingarten
Eppinger Straße 221
74211 Leingarten
Phone +49 7131 40 67-722
Fax +49 7131 40 67-10
sales@gessmann.com
www.gessmann.com
Bureau Gessmann France
Nicolas Patricot
14 rue de la Perruche
78117 Chateaufort
Phone +33 65 20 74 55 9
Fax +33 989 264 847
nicolas.patricot@gessmann.com
www.gessmann.com
Sales office
France
Responsible for:
Finnland
Norwegen
Schweden
Gessmann Office Finland
Harri Järvenpää
Vuorikatu 30 A
23500 Uusikaupunki
Phone + 358 408 2800 10
harri.jarvenpaa@gessmann.com
Sales office
Scandinavia
Responsible for:
USA
Mexico
Chile
Canada
SENETT Control Co. Ltd.
Gessmann Group
8620 Escarpment Way, Unit 5-7
Milton ON L9T 0M1
CANADA
Phone +1 905 693 6948
Fax +1 905 693 8097
sales@senett.ca
www.senett.ca
Subsidiary
North America, Mexico,
Chile, Canada
Responsible for:
China
Gessmann China Ltd.
K2-183, No. 3188 Xiupu Road
201315 Pudong, Shanghai
Phone +86 21 5011 3466
Fax +86 21 5186 1266
sales@gessmann.com.cn
www.gessmann.com
Subsidiary
Asia
USA
OEM Controls, inc.
10 Controls Drive
Shelton, Conn. 06484
Phone +1 203 929 84 31
Fax +1 203 926 69 24
ContactUs@oemcontrols.com
www.oemcontrols.com
Brazil
Choice Tecnologia Ind.e Com.de
equipamentos industrial Ltda
Rua Afonso Fruet, 131, Fazendinha
81320-020 Curitiba / PR
Phone +55 41 3015 7953
Fax +55 41 3015 7853
contato@choicetech.com.br
www.choicetech.com.br
Gessmann Partner
Dr.-Ing. Klaus Zimmermann
Ingenieurbüro
Hauptstraße 158
06493 Harzgerode 0T Neudorf
Phone +49 39484 63 64
Fax +49 39484 63 19
ib-zimmermann@gmx.de
www.gessmann.com
Bretzel GmbH
Postfach 64 331, 64331 Weiterstadt
Am Rotböll 8, 64331 Weiterstadt
Phone +49 0615 086 56 00
Fax +49 0615 086 56 069
info@bretzel-gmbh.de
www.bretzel-gmbh.de
Systemautomation Zimmermann
Dipl.-Ing. Jan Zimmermann
Hauptstraße 158
06493 Harzgerode 0T Neudorf
Phone +49 39484 74 24 84
Fax +49 39484 63 19
saz-zimmermann@gmx.de
www.gessmann.com
Christiani Elektro-Vertriebs-GmbH
Innungstraße 39
50354 Hürth
Phone +49 2233 3 50 35
Fax +49 2233 3 61 81
vertrieb@christiani-gmbh.de
www.christiani-gmbh.de
Representatives in
Germany
Sales Office
Northwest Germany
Phone +49 4221 9285 640
Fax +49 7131 4067 10
tino.krueder@gessmann.com
www.gessmann.com
Responsible for:
India
Gessmann Controllers India Pvt. Ltd.
1st Floor, Plot No. 19/1-A
2nd Main, 2nd Phase,
Peenya Industrial Area
560058 Bangalore
Phone +91 99 4591 9170
gopalshastry@gessmann.com
www.gessmann.com
Subsidiary
India
Dealer network
worldwide
Argentina
Cavotec Latin America S.A.
calle Bogotá 1362
B1640DDL Martínez
Buenos Aires
Phone +54 11 4836 2726
Fax +54 11 4836 2116
info.ar@cavotec.com
www.cavotec.com
Australia
Cavotec Australia Pty Ltd.
Head Office Newcastle
P.O. Box 577
28 Mitchell Road, Cardiff NSW 2285
Phone +61 2 4956 5788
Fax +61 2 4956 5823
info.au@cavotec.com
www.cavotec.com
Belgium
Batenburg Mechatronica B.V.
Leuvensesteenweg 613
1930 Zaventem zuid 7
Phone +32 225 33 120
Fax +32 225 30 897
info@batenburgbelgie.be
www.batenburg-mechatronica.com
Chile
Sistemas de Control Ltda.
La Cordillera 21- Lampa
8320000 Santiago
Phone +562 295 27966
alorca@scontrol.cl
www.scontrol.cl
China
Cavotec (Shanghai) Power Supply and
Crane Technology Co., Ltd.
Unit 11, No. 1951, Duhui Road
Minhang District
Shanghai 201108
Phone + 86 21 5442 9778
Fax + 86 21 3407 3498
info.cn@cavotec.com
www.cavotec.com
Czech Republic
RIA control a.s.
Míru 3
739 61 Trinec-Kanada
Phone +420 553038848
Fax +420 558 988815
info@riacontrol.cz
www.riacontrol.cz
Denmark
Baastrup A/S
Dronning Olgas Vej 30
2000 Frederiksberg
Phone +45 38 10 21 29
Fax +45 38 10 29 69
info@baastrup.com
www.baastrup.com
Finland
Kentek Oy
Postbox 18, 01721 Vantaa
Tiilenlyöjänkuja 4, 01720 Vantaa
Phone +358 9 849 420 0
Fax +358 9 849 420 59
kentek@kentek.fi
www.kentek.fi
Greece
Euroelektrik
Stefanidou Kalliopi & Co.
Agios Dimitios
50100 Kozani
Phone +30 30 2 46 10 9 44 45
Fax +30 30 2 46 10 9 44 25
kastefa@otenet.gr
Hong Kong
Cavotec Hong Kong Ltd.
Unit A, 9th Floor, Chinaweal Centre
414-424 Jaffe Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Phone +852 2791 6161
Fax +852 2791 1834
info.hk@cavotec.com
www.cavotec.com
India
Arihant Elsys Private Limited
24/4866 Ansari Road Darya Ganj
New Delhi – 110002
Phone +91 11 23 26 90 11
Fax +91 11 23 27 35 54
info@arihantelectricals.com
www.arihantelectricals.com
Iran
Lebon Company
# 83, NO.9, Brand Center bldg.
Shahid Lavasani (Farmanieh) Str.
Tehran 1954664598
Phone + 98 21 2614 0496
Fax + 89 21 2613 0981
lebon@lebonco.com
Italy
U-CONTROL Srl
Via G. Righi 2/a
43122 Parma
Phone +39 0521 27 3823
Fax +39 0521 78 9510
info@u-control.eu
www.u-control.eu
Japan
JEPICO Corporation
Shinjuku Front Tower
211 Kita Shinjuku 2-Chome
Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo 169-0074
Phone +81 3 6362 0316
Fax +81 3 5386 8235
a_oeki@jepico.co.jp
www.jepico.co.jp
Kazakhstan
EIM engineering Ltd.
Trefoleva str. 1, liter.P
198097 Sankt-Petersburg
Phone +7 812 325 93 65
info@eim-engineering.ru
Korea
Roritec Co. Ltd.
460-1 Hyomun-Dong
Buk-Ku 683-360 Ulsan
Phone +82 52 288 7114
Fax +82 52 288 7124
keonju@roritec.co.kr
www.roritec.co.kr
Latvia
MAA Intelengineering LTD
Zentenes street 32
1069 Riga
Phone +371 263 90 398
maaintelengineering@gmail.com
Malaysia
PINTSCH-BUBENZER MYPORT SDN BHD
No. 22, Jalan Mega 1/4
Taman Perindustrian Nusa Cemerlang,
81550 Gelang Patah,
Johor Darul Takzim
Phone +607 5319 799
Fax +607 5319 798
info@pbmyport.com.my
www.my-port.net
Mexico
Alimentaciones Electricas, S.A. de C.V.
Parque Industrial Empresarial
Cuautlancingo R.F.C. AEL 740715 1YA
Rio Suchiate No. 24
Phone +52 222 210 50 93
Fax +52 222 210 50 69
almesa@mexis.com.mx
www.almesa.com.mx
Netherlands
Batenburg Mechatronica B.V.
P.O. Box 9393, 3007AJ Rotterdam
Stolwijkstraat 33,
3079 DN Rotterdam
Phone +31 10 2 92 87 87
Fax +31 10 2 92 87 65
info.mechatronica@batenburg.nl
www.batenburg-mechatronica.com
Norway
Cavotec Norge, AS
Strandveien 6
3050 Mjøndalen
Postbox 276
3051 Mjøndalen
Phone +47 32 27 43 00
Fax +47 32 23 00 77
info@cavotec.no
www.cavotec.com
Peru
Sistemas de Control Ltda.
La Cordillera 21- Lampa
8320000 Santiago
Phone +562 295 27966
alorca@scontrol.cl
www.scontrol.cl
Poland
ELEKTRO-TRADING
ul.P.Gojawiczynskiej 13
44-109 Gliwice, Poland
Phone +48 32 330 45 70
Fax +48 32 330 45 74
et@elektro-trading.com.pl
www.elektro-trading.com.pl
Portugal
Kimatic S.L.
Calle Alluitz, 6-1°C
48200 Durango (Bizkaia)
Spain
Phone + 34 946 20 10 36
Fax + 34 946 20 8 32
info@kimatic.es
www.kimatic.es
Romania
ELECTRO-DISTRIBUTION S.R.L.
Str. mecet nr. 42-44, sector 2
Bucuresti
Phone +40 21 253 29 55
Fax +40 21 253 29 56
office@electrodistribution.ro
www.electrodistribution.ro
Russia
Smart Automatica Ltd.
Belinski str 83, office 416
620026 Jekaterinburg
Phone +7 343 344 34 21
inf@smartautomatica.ru
Trader Group Ltd.
Himicheskyi narrow str. 1, liter.P
198095 Sankt-Petersburg
Phone +7 812 3259 365
tradergroupspb@gmail.com
Serbia
Bosnia-Herzegovina
Kosovo
Macedonia
Montenegro
Elektro UMI d.o.o.
Milene Cupic 11
11250 Zeleznik
Phone +381 11 2576 206
Fax +381 11 2577 364
office@elektroumi.rs
www.elektroumi.rs
Singapore
Cavotec Singapore PTE Ltd.
No. 8, Boon Lay Way,
Tradehub21 #07-05
Singapore 609964
Phone +65 6862 2545
Fax +65 6862 2548
info.sg@cavotec.com
www.cavotec.com
Slovakia
VENIO, s.r.o.
Karmínová 1092/3
01030 Zilina
Phone +421 949 130 270
venio@venio.sk
www.venio.sk
South Africa
Powermite
A division of Hudaco Trading (PTY) Ltd.
92, Main Reef Road
1724 Roodepoort
Phone +27 11 271 0000
Fax +27 11 760 3099
info@powermite.co.za
www.powermite.co.za
Spain
Kimatic S.L.
Calle Sasikoa, 30
48200 Durango (Vizcaya)
Phone + 34 946 20 10 36
Fax + 34 946 20 8 32
info@kimatic.es
www.kimatic.es
Sweden
Kiepe Elektriska AB
Lodgatan 4
21124 Malmö
Phone +46 40 29 15 55
Fax +46 40 29 12 31
kiepe@kiepe.se
www.kiepe.se
Switzerland
ELVA AG – Elektrische Verteilanlagen
Werbhollenstrasse 54
4143 Dornach
Phone +41 61 706 85 95
Fax +41 61 706 85 91
info@elva.ch
www.elva.ch
Thailand
Philippines
Vietnam
MTI Engineering CO., LTD
94/20, moo 3, Soi-Janthongaium
Bangrakpattana, Bangbaothong
Nonthaburi 11110
Phone +662 02 1902050 53
Fax +662 02 19020 54
info@mti-eng.com
www.mti-eng.com
Turkey
ARDA Makina Elektrik
Ticaret ve Sanayi Ltd. Sti.
100. Yıl Bulvarı 1230. Street No.1
06374 Ostim-Ankara
Phone +90 312 385 80 37
Fax +90 312 385 80 58
arda@ardaelektrik.com
www.ardaelektrik.com
Ukraine
Ukrgasgeoavtomatika, Ltd.
Str. Okjabrskoj revoluziji, 93
61004 Charkov
Phone +38 057 758 89 99
Fax +38 057 759 07 32
market@geonorma.com.ua
www.geonorma.prom.ua
United Arab Emirates
Cavotec Middle East FZE
P.O. Box 61 124
Jebel Ali Free Zone, AA2 & AA3-RA08
Dubai
Phone +971 488 38 350
Fax +971 488 38 352
info.ae@cavotec.com
www.cavotec.com
United Kingdom
Cavotec UK Limited
Unit 5/6 St. Anne’s Industrial Estate
Limeoak Way
Stockton-on-Tees, TS18 2LS
Phone +44 1624 608 245
Fax +44 1624 608 224
sales.uk@cavotec.com
www.cavotec.com
United States
Cavotec USA Inc.
333 Oates Road
Mooresville, NC 28117
Phone +1 704 873 3009
Fax +1 704 873 3093
sales.us@cavotec.com
www.cavotec.com
Notes
www.gessmann.com
W. Gessmann GmbH
P/O Box 11 51
74207 Leingarten
GERMANY
Eppinger Straße 221
74211 Leingarten
GERMANY
Phone +49 (0) 7131 40 67-0
Fax +49 (0) 7131 40 67-10
sales@gessmann.com
www.gessmann.com